hit counter script
Sharp MX-4140N Operation Manual

Sharp MX-4140N Operation Manual

Digital color multifunction system
Hide thumbs Also See for MX-4140N:
Table of Contents

Advertisement

DIGITAL COLOR MULTIFUNCTION SYSTEM
MX-4140N / MX-4141N / MX-5140N / MX-5141N
OperationS GUIDE

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Summary of Contents for Sharp MX-4140N

  • Page 1 DIGITAL COLOR MULTIFUNCTION SYSTEM MX-4140N / MX-4141N / MX-5140N / MX-5141N OPERATIONS GUIDE...
  • Page 2 CONTENTS Page 1 of 14 OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES N A M E S A N D F U N C T I O N S O F I N D I V I D U A L P A R T S P E R I P H E R A L D E V I C E S E X T E R I O R P E R I P H E R A L D E V I C E S...
  • Page 3 CONTENTS Page 2 of 14 S T O R I N G A D D R E S S E S F R O M F A X O R I M A G E B I L L I N G C O D E S E N D L O G S U S I N G A B I L L I N G C O D E S T O R I N G G R O U P S...
  • Page 4 CONTENTS Page 3 of 14 C O P Y I N G M U L T I P L E O R I G I N A L S O N E A C H C O P Y I N G B O T H S I D E S O F A C A R D A S A S I N G L E P A M P H L E T C O P Y P A G E ( P A M P H L E T C O P Y P A G E ( C A R D S H O T ) 2 I N 1 / 4 I N 1 )
  • Page 5 CONTENTS Page 4 of 14 A D J U S T I N G T H E I N T E N S I T Y O F A C O P Y ( I N T E N S I T Y ) PRINTER P R I N T E R F U N C T I O N O F T H E M A C H I N E B A S I C P R I N T I N G P R O C E D U R E...
  • Page 6 CONTENTS Page 5 of 14 P R I N T I N G T E X T O N T A B S O F T A B P A P E R ( T A B S A V I N G A N D U S I N G P R I N T F I L E S ( F O R C E P A P E R S E T T I N G S / T A B P A P E R P R I N T ) R E T E N T I O N / D O C U M E N T F I L I N G ) T W O - S I D E D P R I N T I N G W I T H S P E C I F I C P A G E S...
  • Page 7 CONTENTS Page 6 of 14 U S I N G T H E D O C U M E N T G L A S S F O R S P E C I F Y I N G T H E O R I G I N A L S C A N S I Z E I N T R A N S M I S S I O N P A P E R S I Z E U S I N G T H E D O C U M E N T G L A S S T O S E N D A F A X...
  • Page 8: Image Send

    CONTENTS Page 7 of 14 C R E A T I N G M E M O R Y B O X E S I N T H E M A C H I N E C H E C K I N G T H E D O C U M E N T I N T H E P U B L I C F O R F - C O D E C O M M U N I C A T I O N B O X F - C O D E D I A L I N G...
  • Page 9 CONTENTS Page 8 of 14 S E N D I N G A N I N T E R N E T F A X F R O M A P C ( P C - I - S C A N S I Z E A N D S E N D S I Z E C H E C K I N G T H E I M A G E T O B E T R A N S M I T T E D F A X ) ( E N L A R G E / R E D U C E )
  • Page 10: Document Filing

    CONTENTS Page 9 of 14 F O R W A R D I N G R E C E I V E D D A T A M A N U A L L Y M E T A D A T A D E L I V E R Y ( D A T A E N T R Y ) S E T T I N G S R E Q U I R E D I N T H E S E T T I N G M O D E M E T A D A T A D E L I V E R Y ( W E B V E R S I O N )
  • Page 11 CONTENTS Page 10 of 14 D E V I C E S T A T U S D O C U M E N T O P E R A T I O N S N E T W O R K S T A T U S U S E R C O N T R O L P O W E R R E S E T B I L L I N G C O D E S E T T I N G...
  • Page 12 CONTENTS Page 11 of 14 Q U I C K S E T T I N G S D E V I C E C O N T R O L G E N E R A L S E T T I N G S V A R I O U S S E T T I N G P R O T O C O L S E T T I N G S C O P Y F U N C T I O N S E T T I N G S...
  • Page 13: Troubleshooting

    CONTENTS Page 12 of 14 H I D D E N P A T T E R N P R I N T T R A C K I N G I N F O R M A T I O N P R I N T I N I T I A L I Z E P R I V A T E D A T A / D A T A I N M A C H I N E TROUBLESHOOTING C A N C E L I N G O P E R A T I O N A N D R E S E T T I N G...
  • Page 14 CONTENTS Page 13 of 14 A O N E - T O U C H I N D I V I D U A L K E Y O R G R O U P T H E P R O P E R T Y O F A F I L E C A N N O T B E S E T T O G E N E R A L P R O B L E M S K E Y C A N N O T B E E D I T E D O R D E L E T E D [ C O N F I D E N T I A L ]...
  • Page 15 CONTENTS Page 14 of 14 Y O U F O R G O T T H E A D M I N I S T R A T O R P A S S W O R D APPENDIX H O W T O U S E T H E U S E R ' S M A N U A L C L E A N I N G A N D R E P L A C E M E N T H O W T O U S E T H E U S E R ' S M A N U A L O V E R V I E W O F C L E A N I N G...
  • Page 16 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 1 of 84 Digital full-color multifunction machine MX-4140N/MX- 4141N/MX-5140N/MX-5141N PRINTING "APPENDIX" file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 17 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 2 of 84 HOW TO USE THE USER'S MANUAL Overview This section explains how to use the User's Manual. A desired function can be displayed by switching the mode tab and then selecting the title. It can also be displayed from the contents, index, or search. Click a tab of the mode you want to see Tap the item that you want to see from the menu on the left of the screen...
  • Page 18 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 3 of 84 Search and Display Enter a word to be searched, then click the [SEARCH] button to display the search result screen. Click the item you want to see. file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 19 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 4 of 84 Display from Index Clicking the [INDEX] tab displays the index screen. Click the item you want to see. file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 20 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 5 of 84 Meanings of icons used in the User's Manual T h i s a l e r t s y o u t o a s i t u a t i o n t h a t c o u l d r e s u l t i n d e a t h o r s e r i o u s p e r s o n a l i n j u r y .
  • Page 21 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 6 of 84 T h i s e x p l a i n s a r e s t r i c t i o n o f f u n c t i o n o r o p e r a t i o n p r o c e d u r e . T h i s e x p l a i n s h o w t o s t o p o r c o r r e c t a n o p e r a t i o n .
  • Page 22 • The contents of the User's Manual have been created with great care. However, should you have any questions or information regarding this manual when you use it, please do not hesitate to contact "SHARP Service Department". • Strict quality control and inspection were performed before this machine was shipped.
  • Page 23 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 8 of 84 USER'S MANUAL DOWNLOAD If you wish to view the User's Manual on your PC, download it from this machine. I f t h e m a c h i n e i s n o t c o n n e c t e d t o t h e n e t w o r k , y o u c a n n o t d o w n l o a d t h e U s e r ' s M a n u a l .
  • Page 24 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 9 of 84 Click [Operation Manual Download] on the menu Select the language you wish to download Click the [Download] button Expand the "User's Manual" you have downloaded in step 4 If you use Windows, right-click the downloaded "User's Manual", and select [Expand All] from the menu.
  • Page 25 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 10 of 84 Double click "index (.htm)" "User's Manual" appears. D e p e n d i n g o n y o u r W e b b r o w s e r , a w a r n i n g m e s s a g e m a y a p p e a r i n t h e i n f o r m a t i o n b a r o r d i a l o g b o x t o i n d i c a t e t h a t y o u r W e b b r o w s e r h a s r e s t r i c t e d v i e w i n g o f t h i s f i l e t o h e l p p r o t e c t s e c u r i t y .
  • Page 26 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 11 of 84 OVERVIEW OF CLEANING To ensure that the machine continues to provide top quality performance, periodically clean the machine. If colored/white lines or misfeeds occur, follow the cleaning procedures below. C l e a n t h e f o l l o w i n g p a r t s s e q u e n t i a l l y u n t i l n o W h e n d i r t y s p o t s o r c o l o r e d i r t y s p o t s , o r c o l o r e d / w h i t e l i n e s a r e l e f t .
  • Page 27 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 12 of 84 T h e a r e a w i t h a m i r r o r - l i k e f i n i s h i s s h o w n a s 09-044_2.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 28 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 13 of 84 CLEANING OF THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER When dirty spots or colored/white lines are Examples of lines in the left on scanned images, clean the following image parts. Keep these parts clean at all times. When using the document glass: document glass,...
  • Page 29: Document Glass

    USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 14 of 84 DOCUMENT GLASS To clean this part, select a soft cloth for wiping. If necessary, moisten the cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent. After that, wipe with a clean dry cloth. 09-045-1.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 30 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 15 of 84 DOCUMENT BACKPLATE SHEET To clean this part, select a soft cloth for wiping. If necessary, moisten the cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent. After that, wipe with a clean dry cloth. 09-045-2.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 31: Scanning Area

    To clean this part, use the glass cleaner that is stored in the automatic document feeder. After using the glass cleaner, be sure to return it to its storage position. When using the MX-4140N/MX-5140N Open the automatic document feeder and remove the glass cleaner.
  • Page 32 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 17 of 84 When using the MX-4141N/MX-5141N Open the automatic document feeder and remove the glass cleaner. Clean the document scanning area on the document glass with the glass cleaner. One scanning area is on the document glass and the other is inside the automatic document feeder.
  • Page 33 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 18 of 84 Open the scanning area cover on the automatic document feeder. Push in the release switch to release the cover. Clean the scanning area in the automatic document feeder. Close the cover. Replace the glass cleaner. 09-045-3.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 34: Cleaning The Main Charger Of The Photoconductive Drum

    USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 19 of 84 CLEANING THE MAIN CHARGER OF THE PHOTOCONDUCTIVE DRUM Overview If black lines or colored lines appear even after you have cleaned document glass and automatic document feeder, use the charger cleaner to clean the main charger that charges the photoconductive drum.
  • Page 35 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 20 of 84 The toner collection container will fall forward as shown. Gently support the container with your hands as you let it fall forward as far as it will go. Grasp the green knob to release the lock and gently remove the charger cleaner.
  • Page 36 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 21 of 84 Insert it so that label (A) on the cleaning target side and label (B) on the charger cleaner side are oriented as shown. Repeat step 4 with all other main chargers. There are a total of 4 places to be cleaned in the machine as shown.
  • Page 37 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 22 of 84 Push the toner collection container into the machine. Push the container in until it clicks into place. Close the front cover. 09-046.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 38: Cleaning The Bypass Feed Roller

    USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 23 of 84 CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER If paper misfeeds frequently occur when feeding envelopes or heavy paper through the bypass tray, wipe the surface of the feed roller with a clean soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent. 09-048.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 39: Cleaning The Paper Feed Roller

    USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 24 of 84 CLEANING THE PAPER FEED ROLLER (for MX-4140N/MX-5140N only) If lines or other dirt appear on the scanned original when the automatic document feeder is used, wipe the surface of the roller with a clean soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent.
  • Page 40: Cleaning The Laser Unit

    USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 25 of 84 CLEANING THE LASER UNIT Overview When the laser unit inside the machine becomes dirty, line patterns (colored lines) may form in the printed image. If line patterns (colored lines) appear, clean the laser unit. Identifying lines (colored lines) caused by a dirty laser unit •...
  • Page 41 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 26 of 84 (3) Turn the cleaning tool around the boss to detach it from the left hand hook. Make sure that the cleaner at the tip of the cleaning tool is not dirty. If the cleaner is dirty, remove the cleaner from the cleaning tool and replace it with a clean one.
  • Page 42 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 27 of 84 Remove the dirty cleaner from the tip of the cleaning tool. While firmly grasping the tool where the cleaner is attached, use your other hand to press down on the hook that secures the cleaner, and remove the cleaner.
  • Page 43 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 28 of 84 Point the cleaner down and slowly insert the tool into the hole that you wish to clean. Be sure to point the cleaner down. Labels similar to (A) are attached to areas that require cleaning. Insert the cleaning tool all the way into the hole and then pull it back out.
  • Page 44 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 29 of 84 Repeat steps 7 to 9 to clean all holes (4 holes) in the laser unit. There are a total of four holes to be cleaned in the laser unit. Clean all holes. Replace the cleaning tool.
  • Page 45 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 30 of 84 Close the front cover. 09-050.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 46 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 31 of 84 REPLACEMENT OF TONER CARTRIDGE Overview When toner is running low, the message "Prepare toner" appears. You should keep one set of replacement toner cartridges on hand so that you can replace a toner cartridge immediately when toner runs out.
  • Page 47 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 32 of 84 Colors that are running low or have run out of toner are indicated in ( ). Y: Yellow toner, M: Magenta toner, C: Cyan toner, and Bk: Black toner Replace the toner cartridge with a one of the relevant color. •...
  • Page 48 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 33 of 84 • B e s u r e t o i n s t a l l f o u r t o n e r c a r t r i d g e s ( Y / M / C / B k ) . •...
  • Page 49 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 34 of 84 Gently pull out the toner cartridge horizontally. If the cartridge is pulled out abruptly, toner may spill out. (Example) Replacing the yellow toner cartridge Hold the toner cartridge with both hands as shown and slowly pull it out of the machine.
  • Page 50 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 35 of 84 Push the cartridge in until it locks securely in place. Keep pushing in the cartridge until it clicks into place. Close the front cover. After the toner cartridge is replaced, the machine automatically enters image adjustment mode.
  • Page 51: Replacing The Toner Collection Container

    USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 36 of 84 REPLACING THE TONER COLLECTION CONTAINER Overview The toner collection container collects excess toner that is produced during printing. When the toner collection container becomes full, "Replace used toner container." will appear. • D o n o t t h r o w t h e t o n e r c o l l e c t i o n c o n t a i n e r i n t o a f i r e .
  • Page 52 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 37 of 84 K e e p t h e r e p l a c e m e n t c l e a n e r t h a t h a s n o t b e e n u s e d . S t o r e i t a t t h e l e f t o f t h e n e w t o n e r c o l l e c t i o n c o n t a i n e r .
  • Page 53 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 38 of 84 Place a sheet of paper such as newspaper on the surface before placing the toner collection container. D o n o t p o i n t t h e h o l e s d o w n a s u s e d t o n e r w i l l s p i l l o u t . Remove the seals around the holes.
  • Page 54 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 39 of 84 • T h e r e a r e 4 s e a l s . P l u g a l l o f t h e h o l e s . •...
  • Page 55 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 40 of 84 09-052.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 56: Replacing The Stamp Cartridge

    (AR-SV1). Supplies Stamp cartridge (2 in package) AR-SV1 Operation When using the MX-4140N/MX-5140N Open the automatic document feeder. Open the holders on the automatic document feeder that hold the original pressure sheet. Open the holders (two) on the left and right sides.
  • Page 57 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 42 of 84 Grasp the tab on the stamp unit and pull the unit out. Remove the stamp cartridge (A). Install a new stamp cartridge. Push the stamp unit back in. file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 58 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 43 of 84 Push the stamp unit in until it clicks into place. Replace the original pressure sheet. Push the holders in until they click into place. Close the automatic document feeder. When using the MX-4141N/MX-5141N Open the automatic document feeder.
  • Page 59 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 44 of 84 Remove the document backplate sheet from the automatic document feeder. Remove the sheet slowly. Place the removed sheet with the side that was attached face up on the document glass. Grasp the tab on the stamp unit and pull the unit out. Remove the stamp cartridge (A).
  • Page 60 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 45 of 84 Install a new stamp cartridge. Push the stamp unit back in. Push the stamp unit in until it clicks into place. Close the automatic document feeder to attach the document backplate sheet. When the automatic document feeder is closed, the document backplate sheet on the document glass attaches to the automatic document feeder.
  • Page 61 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 46 of 84 If the document backplate sheet is not firmly attached, remove the sheet and then close the automatic document feeder again to firmly attach the sheet. 09-053.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 62: Items Recorded In The Job Log

    USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 47 of 84 ITEMS RECORDED IN THE JOB LOG The machine records the performed jobs in the job log. The main information recorded in the job log is described below. • T o m a k e i t e a s y t o t o t a l t h e u s a g e c o u n t s o f d i f f e r e n t l y c o n f i g u r e d m a c h i n e s , t h e i t e m s r e c o r d e d i n t h e j o b l o g a r e f i x e d , r e g a r d l e s s o f w h a t p e r i p h e r a l d e v i c e s a r e i n s t a l l e d o r t h e o b j e c t i v e o f t h e r e c o r d i n g .
  • Page 63 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 48 of 84 a c c o u n t - j o b - i d T h e j o b I D u s e d i n t h e O S A i s r e c o r d e d .
  • Page 64 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 49 of 84 N u m b e r o f C a r d I s s u T h e n u m b e r o a n c e f t i m e s t h e c a r d h a s b e e n i s s u e d i s w r i t t e n i n a n S S F C I C...
  • Page 65 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 50 of 84 B l a c k & W h i t e T o t a l C F o r a p r i n t j o o u n t b , t h e t o t a l c o u n t i s r e c o r d e d .
  • Page 66 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 51 of 84 F u l l C o l o r T o t a l C o u n t F o r a p r i n t j o b , t h e t o t a l c o u n t i s r e c o r d e d .
  • Page 67 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 52 of 84 2 - C o l o r T o t a l C o u n t T h e t o t a l n u m b e r o f p a g e s i n a p r i n t j o b t h a t h a v e b e e n p r i n t e d u s i n g...
  • Page 68 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 53 of 84 I n v a l i d P a p e r C o u n t T h e c o l o r i n v a ( C o l o r ) l i d s h e e t c o u n t i s r e c o r d e d .
  • Page 69 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 54 of 84 E r r o r C a u s e W h e n a n e r r o r o c c u r s d u r i n g a j o b , t h e c a u s e o f t h e e r r o r i s r e c o r d e d .
  • Page 70 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 55 of 84 S e n d e r N a m e S e n d e r n a m e o f a n i m a g e s e n d j o b i s r e c o r d e d .
  • Page 71 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 56 of 84 F i l e F o r m a t F i l e f o r m a t o f a n i m a g e s e n d j o b i s r e c o r d e d .
  • Page 72 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 57 of 84 S p e c i a l M o d e s S p e c i a l m o d e s s e l e c t e d w h e n t h e j o b w a s e x e c u t e d i s r e c o r d e d .
  • Page 73 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 58 of 84 P a p e r S i z e F o r a p r i n t j o b , t h e p a p e r s i z e i s r e c o r d e d .
  • Page 74 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 59 of 84 U n i t S e r i a l N u m b e r T h e s e r i a l n u m b e r o f t h e m a c h i n e i s r e c o r d e d .
  • Page 75 Read "TROUBLESHOOTING". if a particular problem persists, stop using your machine. Unplug the power cable from the machine and contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department and inform the following items: An optional field service is also available. P r o d u c t n a m e...
  • Page 76 IF YOUR ADDRESS CHANGES Overview When the machine is transferred, the internal toner cartridge needs to be taken out. Please contact your dealer or "SHARP Service Department" in your area before you change your place of residence. 09-034.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 77 When the maintenance execution time is approaching, a message will appear on the touch panel. When the message is displayed, contact your dealer or "SHARP Service Department" in your area as soon as possible. 09-035.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 78 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 63 of 84 MAINTENANCE SERVICE SYSTEM Overview We provide two types of optional maintenance services to maintain the performance and functions of this product: the Counter Service System and the Spot Service System. For service system details, contact the dealer and select the most appropriate service.
  • Page 79 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 64 of 84 MINIMUM HOLDING PERIOD OF PERFORMANCE PARTS FOR REPAIR PURPOSES Overview In order to ensure our maintenance services, we will retain performance parts for this product for seven (7) years after production is discontinued. Performance parts refers to parts that are required to maintain the functions of this product.
  • Page 80 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 65 of 84 MINIMUM HOLDING PERIOD OF SUPPLIES Overview We will retain supplies of this product for seven (7) years after it has been discontinued. 09-038.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 81: License Information

    Software developed by SHARP and open source software The copyrights for the software components and various relevant documents included with this product that were developed or written by SHARP are owned by SHARP and are protected by the Copyright Act, international treaties, and other relevant laws.
  • Page 82 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 67 of 84 Software Copyrights Copyright (c) 2000 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
  • Page 83 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 68 of 84 Copyright (c) 1995 - 2008 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden). All rights reserved. All rights reserved. Export of this software from the United States of America may require a specific license from the United States Government. It is the responsibility of any person or organization contemplating export to obtain such a license before exporting.
  • Page 84 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 69 of 84 Copyright (c) 1998-2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
  • Page 85 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 70 of 84 WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
  • Page 86 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 71 of 84 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
  • Page 87 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 72 of 84 CONSUMABLE TYPES AND STORAGE METHODS Consumable Types You should use our recommended copy paper and label paper. Please consult your dealer for details. You should use our specified toner cartridges, staple cartridges, and transparency films.
  • Page 88 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 73 of 84 Store a new toner cartridge box horizontally, not setting upvertically, being careful not to invertreverse the top and bottom. If a box is stored vertically, the toner flowability reduces even if you shake the toner cartridge well before using it, and toner may remain in a cartridge without getting into the machine.
  • Page 89 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 74 of 84 Put copy paper in a bag, and store it on a flat place. If you do not put paper in a bag or you set up paper for storage, curling or moisture absorption occurs, resulting in a paper jam. Be sure to put the rest of paper in a bag, and close the top of the bag for storage, otherwise paper curling or moisture absorption occurs, resulting in a paper jam.
  • Page 90 Before using any paper, consult the dealer or SHARP Service Department. We Thank You for Your Co-operation in Recycling Used Products. Sharp collects used products to help preserve the Earth’s environment and the effective use of of its resources, promoting the reuse or recycling of products and parts.
  • Page 91: Trademark Acknowledgements

    NEC, PC-9821, and PC98-NX are registered trademarks or trademarks of NEC Corporation. • Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation. • Sharp OSA is a trademark of Sharp Corporation. • RealVNC is a trademark of RealVNC Limited. • All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
  • Page 92 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 77 of 84 ® UFST (Universal Font Scaling Technology) of Monotype Imaging. ® ® MicroType and UFST are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions.
  • Page 93 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 78 of 84 Intellifont, MicroType and UFST are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Macintosh and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and other countries.
  • Page 94: Software License

    USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 79 of 84 SOFTWARE LICENSE file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 95 USER'S MANUAL - APPENDIX Page 80 of 84 PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE. BY USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 96 License, whether on disk, in read only memory, or on any other medi a (the "Software") and related documentation are licensed to you by SHA RP. You own the disk on which the Software is recorded but SHARP and/o r SHARP's Licensors retain title to the Software and related documentatio n.
  • Page 97 4. Export Law Assurances You agree and certify that neither the Software nor any other technical da ta received from SHARP, nor the direct product thereof, will be exported o utside the United States except as authorized and as permitted by the law s and regulations of the United States.
  • Page 98 The Software and related documentation are provided "AS IS" a nd without warranty of any kind and SHARP and SHARP's Licensor(s) (for the purpose of provisions 6 and 7, SHARP and SHARP's Licensor(s) shall b e collectively referred to as "SHARP") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRA...
  • Page 99 LUSION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. In no event shall SHARP's total liability to you for all damages, losses, and causes of action (whether in contract, tort (including negligence) or other wise) exceed the amount paid by you for the Software.
  • Page 100 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 1 of 227 Digital full-color multifunction machine MX-4140N/MX- 4141N/MX-5140N/MX-5141N PRINTING "OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES" file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 101 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 2 of 227 EXTERIOR This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts on the exterior of the machine. Tap the name to make its details pop up. A u t o m a t i c d o c u m e n t f e e d e r T h i s a u t o m a t i c a l l y f e e d s a n d s c a n s m u l t i p l e o r i g i n a l s .
  • Page 102 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 3 of 227 S a d d l e f i n i s h e r ( l a r g e s t a c k e r ) T h i s s t a p l e s a n d f o l d s p a p e r .
  • Page 103 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 4 of 227 T r a y 5 ( w h e n a l a r g e c a p a c i t y p a p e r t r a y i s i n s t a l l e d ) S t o r e p a p e r i n t h i s t r a y .
  • Page 104 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 5 of 227 * 1 I t i s o p t i o n a l f o r M X - 4 1 4 0 N / M X - 5 1 4 0 N . * 2 O p t i o n a l 01-001.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 105: Inside The Machine

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 6 of 227 UPPER SIDE This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts inside the machine. T o n e r c a r t r i d g e T h i s c a r t r i d g e c o n t a i n s t o n e r .
  • Page 106 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 7 of 227 ” p o s i t i o n . T U R N I N G O N T H E P O W E R T o n e r c o l l e c t i o n c o n t a i n e r T h i s c o n t a i n e r c o l l e c t s e x c e s s t o n e r t h a t r e m a i n s a f t e r p r i n t i n g .
  • Page 107 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 8 of 227 01-002.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 108 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 9 of 227 This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts on the upper side of the machine. P a p e r f e e d r o l l e r T h i s r o l l e r r o t a t e s t o a u t o m a t i c a l l y f e e d t h e o r i g i n a l .
  • Page 109 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 10 of 227 a u t o m a t i c d o c u m e n t f e e d e r , p l a c e t h e m o n t h i s g l a s s . D O C U M E N T G L A S S Tap the name to make its details pop up.
  • Page 110 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 11 of 227 01-003.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 111: Side And Back

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 12 of 227 SIDE AND BACK This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts on the side and back of the machine. U S B p o r t ( A t y p e ) T h i s i s u s e d t o c o n n e c t a U S B d e v i c e s u c h a s a U S B m e m o r y d e v i c e t o t h e m a c h i n e .
  • Page 112 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 13 of 227 E x t e n s i o n p h o n e j a c k W h e n t h e f a x f u n c t i o n o f t h e m a c h i n e i s u s e d , a n e x t e n s i o n p h o n e c a n b e c o n n e c t e d t o t h i s j a c k .
  • Page 113: Operation Panel

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 14 of 227 OPERATION PANEL This section describes the names and functions of the respective parts of the operation panel. T o u c h p a n e l M e s s a g e s a n d k e y s a p p e a r o n t h e t o u c h p a n e l d i s p l a y . O p e r a t e t h e m a c h i n e b y d i r e c t l y t a p p i n g t h e d i s p l a y e d k e y s .
  • Page 114 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 15 of 227 [ H o m e S c r e e n ] b u t t o n U s e y o u r f i n g e r t o t o u c h t h e [ H o m e S c r e e n ] b u t t o n . I f y o u u s e a p e n o r o t h e r t o o l t o t o u c h t h e b u t t o n , i t m a y n o t o p e r a t e p r o p e r l y .
  • Page 115: Peripheral Devices

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 16 of 227 PERIPHERAL DEVICES Peripheral devices can be installed on the machine to increase its range of functionality. The peripheral devices are generally optional. However, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment. (As of June 2013) P r o d u c t P r o d u c t n a m e...
  • Page 116 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 17 of 227 F I N I S H E R M X - F N X 9 O u t p u t d e v i c e t h a t e n a b l e s t h e u s e o f t h e s t a p l e f u n c t i o n a n d o f f s e t f u n c t i o F I N I S H E R ( L A R G E S T A C K M X - F N 1 1...
  • Page 117 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 18 of 227 X P S e x p a n s i o n k i t M X - P U X 1 T h i s k i t c a n b e u s e d a s a n X P S c o m p a t i b l e p r i n t e r .
  • Page 118 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 19 of 227 S h a r p O S A N e t w o r k S c a n M X - U N 5 0 n e r T o o l 5 0 L i c e n s e K i t S h a r p O S A N e t w o r k S c a n M X - U N 1 H n e r T o o l 1 0 0 L i c e n s e K i t...
  • Page 119: Finisher Maintenance

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 20 of 227 FINISHER Overview This device outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper. As needed, it staples each set. To punch holes in printed paper, install an optional hole punch module.
  • Page 120 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 21 of 227 S t a p l e c a s e T h i s h o l d s t h e s t a p l e c a r t r i d g e . P u l l t h e c a s e o u t t o r e p l a c e t h e s t a p l e c a r t r i d g e o r r e m o v e a s t a p l e j a m .
  • Page 121: Replacing The Cartridge

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 22 of 227 Finisher maintenance When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge. Operation Replacing the cartridge Open the cover.
  • Page 122 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 23 of 227 Lower the staple case release lever and remove the staple case. Pull the staple case out to the right. Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple case. Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case as shown.
  • Page 123 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 24 of 227 Replace the staple case. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. Slide the finisher back to the right. Gently slide the finisher back to the right until it locks into its original position.
  • Page 124 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 25 of 227 M a k e a p r o o f c o p y i n s t a p l e s o r t f u n c t i o n t o v e r i f y t h a t s t a p l i n g t a k e s p l a c e c o r r e c t l y .
  • Page 125 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 26 of 227 FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) Overview This device outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper. As needed, it staples each set. To punch holes in printed paper, install an optional hole punch module.
  • Page 126 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 27 of 227 • A p a p e r p a s s u n i t i s r e q u i r e d t o i n s t a l l a f i n i s h e r ( l a r g e s t a c k e r ) a s w e l l a s a s t a n d / 1 x 5 0 0 / 2 x 5 0 0 / 2 0 0 0 s h e e t p a p e r d r a w e r .
  • Page 127 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 28 of 227 When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the operation procedure to replace the staple cartridge. Operation Replacing the cartridge Open the front cover.
  • Page 128 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 29 of 227 Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place. D o n o t r e m o v e t h e s e a l f r o m t h e c a r t r i d g e b e f o r e i n s e r t i n g t h e c a r t r i d g e i n t o t h e c a s e .
  • Page 129 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 30 of 227 Close the front cover. M a k e a t e s t p r i n t o r c o p y i n s t a p l e s o r t m o d e t o v e r i f y t h a t s t a p l i n g t a k e s p l a c e c o r r e c t l y .
  • Page 130 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 31 of 227 SADDLE FINISHER Overview This includes the offset function that outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper, the staple sort function that staples each set of prints, the saddle stitch function that automatically staples the center of the sheets and folds the sheets in half, and the paper folding function that folds paper in half.
  • Page 131 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 32 of 227 F r o n t c o v e r O p e n t h i s c o v e r t o r e p l a c e t h e s t a p l e c a r t r i d g e , r e m o v e a s t a p l e j a m , o r r e m o v e a p a p e r m i s f e e d .
  • Page 132 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 33 of 227 Finisher unit Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SCX1 Saddle stitch unit Staple cartridge (approx. 2000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) AR-SC3 Saddle finisher maintenance When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel.
  • Page 133 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 34 of 227 Replacing the staple cartridge (finisher unit) Open the front cover. A saddle finisher cannot be installed simultaneously with a finisher, finisher (large stacker) or saddle finisher (large stacker). While pulling the lever, slide the saddle finisher to the left until it stops.
  • Page 134 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 35 of 227 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple case. Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case as shown. Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place. Replace the staple case.
  • Page 135 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 36 of 227 Push the saddle finisher back and latch it to the machine. Gently slide the finisher back to the right until it locks into its original position. Close the front cover. M a k e a p r o o f c o p y i n s t a p l e s o r t f u n c t i o n t o v e r i f y t h a t s t a p l i n g t a k e s p l a c e c o r r e c t l y .
  • Page 136 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 37 of 227 Replacing the staple cartridge (saddle stitch unit) Before starting this procedure, remove all output from the output tray of the saddle finisher. Do not replace removed output back in the output tray.
  • Page 137 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 38 of 227 Close the side cover. 01-038.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 138 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 39 of 227 SADDLE FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) Overview This includes the offset function that outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper, the staple sort function that staples each set of prints, the saddle stitch function that automatically staples the center of the sheets and folds the sheets in half, and the paper folding function that folds paper in half.
  • Page 139 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 40 of 227 F r o n t c o v e r O p e n t h i s c o v e r t o r e p l a c e t h e s t a p l e c a r t r i d g e , r e m o v e a s t a p l e j a m , o r r e m o v e a p a p e r m i s f e e d .
  • Page 140 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 41 of 227 Saddle stitch unit Staple cartridge (approx. 2000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) AR-SC3 Saddle finisher (large stacker) maintenance When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel.
  • Page 141 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 42 of 227 Remove the empty staple cartridge. Press the lock button to release the staple case cover and then remove the staple cartridge. W h e n s t a p l e s r e m a i n , t h e s t a p l e c a r t r i d g e c a n n o t b e r e m o v e d . Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case.
  • Page 142 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 43 of 227 Push the staple case firmly back in. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. Close the front cover. M a k e a p r o o f c o p y i n s t a p l e s o r t f u n c t i o n t o v e r i f y t h a t s t a p l i n g t a k e s p l a c e c o r r e c t l y .
  • Page 143 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 44 of 227 Grasp the handle on the saddle stitch unit and pull it slowly out until it stops. Pull the staple unit in the saddle stitch unit out and then rotate it Grasp the left and right side of each empty staple cartridge and remove the cartridges.
  • Page 144 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 45 of 227 Replace both staple cartridges. Remove the cover from each staple cartridge and then install the cartridge. Pull the staple unit of the saddle finisher forward and then rotate it back to its original position.
  • Page 145 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 46 of 227 M a k e a t e s t p r i n t o r c o p y u s i n g t h e s a d d l e s t i t c h f u n c t i o n t o v e r i f y t h a t s t a p l i n g t a k e s p l a c e c o r r e c t l y .
  • Page 146: Punch Module

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 47 of 227 PUNCH MODULE Overview This device can be installed on a finisher or saddle finisher to punch holes in paper to be output. Discarding punch waste Punch waste from punched holes is collected in the punch waste box. Follow the operation procedure to replace punch waste.
  • Page 147 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 48 of 227 Discard the punch waste in a plastic bag or other container, taking care not to let the waste scatter. Gently push the box back in. Close the cover. Finisher (large stacker) installed file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 148 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 49 of 227 Open the front cover of the punch module. Pull out the punch waste box and discard the punch waste. Discard the punch waste in a plastic bag or other container, taking care not to let the waste scatter.
  • Page 149 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 50 of 227 Close the cover of the punch module. Saddle finisher installed Open the front cover. Pull out the punch waste box and discard the punch waste. Discard the punch waste in a plastic bag or other container, taking care not to let the waste scatter.
  • Page 150 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 51 of 227 Replace the punch waste box. Close the front cover. Saddle finisher (large stacker) installed Open the front cover of the punch module. file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 151 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 52 of 227 Pull out the punch waste box and discard the punch waste. Discard the punch waste in a plastic bag or other container, taking care not to let the waste scatter. Replace the punch waste box.
  • Page 152 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 53 of 227 TOUCH TYPES In addition to tapping, equivalent to conventional touching, the touch panel of the machine can be operated by long touching, flicking and sliding. • Operation types •...
  • Page 153 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 54 of 227 Flicking Flick the panel to scroll a previe w image quickly. Dragging Drag (slide your finger touching the panel in a random direction) to replace a page in the original during preview.
  • Page 154 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 55 of 227 Pinch Touch the screen with two finger s and move them toward each o ther. This is used to reduce the browser and preview display. Spread Touch the screen with two finger s and move them away from eac h other.
  • Page 155 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 56 of 227 List (tapping, sliding and flicking) A. Tap to select an item. The selected item changes to a different color. B. Drag the bar up and down. It appears when the item does not fit in the screen. C.
  • Page 156 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 57 of 227 Tab (tapping) A. Tap a tab to switch what is displayed. Preview screen (Double tapping/ Pinch/ Spread) A. When a preview screen is "pinched", the screen image is reduced. When "spread", the image is enlarged.
  • Page 157 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 58 of 227 01-006.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 158: Home Screen

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 59 of 227 HOME SCREEN Overview Pressing the [Home Screen] button on the operation panel displays the home screen on the touch panel. The home screen displays the keys for selecting modes or functions.
  • Page 159 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 60 of 227 P r i n t e r d a t a i s b e i n g p r o c e A m i r r o r i n g k i t i s i n s t a l l e d . s s e d .
  • Page 160: Changing Modes

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 61 of 227 Contact your dealer or SHARP Service Department. CHANGING MODES Changing mode from the Home screen [Home Screen] Tap the mode icon. Operate for each button mode. Changing mode from the mode display...
  • Page 161 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 62 of 227 Tap [Edit Home] on the action panel. If user authentication is not used, enter the administrator password. The screen changes to edit home mode. After editing the shortcut keys in the home screen, tap the [Exit Home Edit Mode] key on the action panel.
  • Page 162 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 63 of 227 A shortcut key with the added function appears in the home screen. Delete a shortcut key Tap the shortcut key you want to delete in home edit mode. Tap the [Delete Key] key on the action panel.
  • Page 163 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 64 of 227 Tap the [Yes] key. The selected shortcut key is deleted from the home screen. A f t e r t a p p i n g t h e s h o r t c u t k e y y o u w a n t t o d e l e t e i n s t e p 1 , y o u c a n a l s o d e l e t e t h e s h o r t c u t k e y b y d r a g g i n g i t t o t h e t r a s h c a n .
  • Page 164 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 65 of 227 In home edit mode, tap the shortcut key you want to move. Tap the [Move Key] key on the action panel. Tap the place where you want to move the shortcut key. The selected shortcut key moves.
  • Page 165 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 66 of 227 In home edit mode, tap the shortcut key whose name you want to change. Tap [Change Key Name] on the action panel. The soft keyboard appears. When the external keyboard is installed, the external keyboard can be entered the text.
  • Page 166 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 67 of 227 A confirmation screen appears. Tap the [Reset] key. The shortcut keys return to the default layout. Changing an MFP display pattern Tap [MFP Display Pattern Setting] on the action panel. Tap a display pattern to be changed.
  • Page 167 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 68 of 227 01-007.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 168: Preview Screen

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 69 of 227 PREVIEW SCREEN Overview In the preview screen, you can view output images or images stored in the machine using the touch panel. Keys used in the preview screen T h i s c h a n g e s t h e m o d e t o e d i t m o d e .
  • Page 169 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 70 of 227 T h i s d i s p l a y s t h u m b n a i l s o f p r e v i e w i m a g e s . T h i s d i s p l a y s p a g e s i n a 3 D v i e w .
  • Page 170 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 71 of 227 Y o u c a n a l s o d e l e t e b y d r a g g i n g a p a g e t o •...
  • Page 171 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 72 of 227 Tap the page you want to move Drag to move the page Y o u c a n a l s o m o v e t h e p a g e b y t a p p i n g t h e [ M o v e t h e P a g e ] k e y o n t h e a c t i o n p a n e l a n d t h e n t a p p i n g o f t h e d e s t i n a t i o n .
  • Page 172 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 73 of 227 Drag to rotate the page Y o u c a n a l s o r o t a t e t h e p a g e b y t a p p i n g t h e [ R o t a t e 1 8 0 D e g r e e s ] k e y o n t h e a c t i o n p a n e l .
  • Page 173 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 74 of 227 Y o u c a n a l s o s e t c h a p t e r i n s e r t s b y t a p p i n g t h e [ S p e c i f y C h a p t e r I n s e r t s ] k e y o n t h e a c t i o n p a n e l .
  • Page 174 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 75 of 227 for the location into which you want to insert a blank page Tap the [Edit End] key Deleting part of the original image In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode Tap the [Erase Specified Range] key on the action panel Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the erase range...
  • Page 175 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 76 of 227 T o d e l e t e t h e i m a g e o u t s i d e t h e s e l e c t e d r a n g e , t a p t h e [ R e v e r s e E r a s e R a n g e ] k e y o n t h e a c t i o n p a n e l .
  • Page 176 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 77 of 227 Tap the [Exit] key Changing the settings Tapping the tab on the left of the screen allows you to change the color mode and other settings. You cannot tap the keys for functions whose settings cannot be changed. 01-010.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 177: Numeric Keys

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 78 of 227 OPERATION OF FREQUENTLY USED KEYS • Numeric keys • [Start] key ([B/W Start] key and [Color Start] key) • [STOP] key ([Cancel Copy] key) • [CA] key Numeric keys Tap a number to enter it.
  • Page 178 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 79 of 227 [STOP] key ([Cancel Copy] key) Tap to stop a print or send job. I n c o p y m o d e , t h e [ C a n c e l C o p y ] k e y i s d i s p l a y e d . [CA] key Tap to cancel all settings and restore the initial status in each mode.
  • Page 179 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 80 of 227 ACTION PANEL Overview Recommended functions are displayed on the action panel when you configure functions in each mode. From the action panel, you can configure functions or combine the configured function with a function displayed on the action panel.
  • Page 180 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 81 of 227 T o a l w a y s d i s p l a y t h e a c t i o n p a n e l I n "...
  • Page 181 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 82 of 227 CONFIRMATION SCREEN FOR FAVORITE MENUS AND SETTINGS When you register frequently used functions you have configured for copying or image sending in Favorite, you can quickly call them. Operation Registering a function in Favorite Display the function you frequently use...
  • Page 182 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 83 of 227 Tap the key for the function you want to call • F a v o r i t e s c a n b e r e g i s t e r e d o r e d i t e d o n l y b y a u t h e n t i c a t e d u s e r s a n d a d m i n i s t r a t o r s .
  • Page 183 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 84 of 227 01-069.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 184: Turning On The Power

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 85 of 227 TURNING ON THE POWER This section describes how to turn on/off the machine's power and how to restart the machine. Operate two power switches: the main power switch inside the front cover, located in the lower left corner, and the [Power] button on the operation panel.
  • Page 185 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 86 of 227 • W h e n t u r n i n g o f f t h e m a i n p o w e r s w i t c h , p r e s s t h e [ P o w e r ] b u t t o n o n t h e o p e r a t i o n p a n e l a n d t h e n t u r n t h e m a i n p o w e r s w i t c h t o t h e "...
  • Page 186 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 87 of 227 TYPES OF JOB STATUS SCREENS When you tap the job status display, the job status screen appears. Tap it again to return to the previous mode. The job status screen is divided into the following four tabs, enabling you to select a job list by tapping a desired tab.
  • Page 187 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 88 of 227 • G r a y : N o j o b On each tab, jobs are classified into three groups. Jobs move among the lists according to the processing status, from Spool, Job Queue and Complete, in that order.
  • Page 188 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 89 of 227 STOPPING/DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED Tap the job status display and tap the tab for the job that you wish to stop or delete. Tap the [Job Queue] key. W h e n y o u w i s h t o s t o p a p r i n t j o b b e i n g s e n t f r o m t h e c o m p u t e r , t a p t h e [ S p o o l ] k e y .
  • Page 189 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 90 of 227 PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB Overview This function gives priority to processing of copied, faxed or image send jobs arising later to jobs already in a queue for printing or sending.
  • Page 190 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 91 of 227 Tap the job for priority processing and then tap the [Raise Priority] key on the action panel. I f a j o b i n p r o g r e s s i s a " b r o a d c a s t t r a n s m i s s i o n j o b " o r a " s e r i a l p o l l i n g j o b "...
  • Page 191 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 92 of 227 CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS Tap the job status display and tap the tab for the job whose contents you wish to check. Tap the [Job Queue] key. Tap the job whose contents you wish to check and then tap the [Check Details of Selected Job] key on the action panel.
  • Page 192: Checking Completed Jobs

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 93 of 227 CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS T o c h e c k c o m p l e t e d j o b s , y o u n e e d t o b e u s i n g d o c u m e n t f i l i n g . •...
  • Page 193 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 94 of 227 01-065.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 194 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 95 of 227 READING THE JOB LIST The meaning of each job icon and message displayed in "Status" is as follows: • Icons indicating the job type • Messages displayed in "Status" Icons indicating the job type P r i n t j o b ( R G B / C M Y C o p y j o b...
  • Page 195 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 96 of 227 O S A s c a n j o b * This appears in a multi-mode broadcast job. Messages displayed in "Status" Job in progress D i s p l a y S t a t u s "...
  • Page 196 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 97 of 227 " E r r o r " A n e r r o r o c c u r r e d w h i l e t h e j o b w a s b e i n g e x e c u t e d .
  • Page 197 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 98 of 227 " F o r w a r d O K " T h e r e c e i v e d d a t a / r e c e i v e d d a t a ( e a c h f i l e ) h a s b e e n f o r w a r d e d .
  • Page 198: Authentication By User Number

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 99 of 227 AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER Overview The following procedure is used to log in using a user number received from the administrator of the machine. When starting the machine, the login screen appears. When controlled by user number I f a n i n c o r r e c t u s e r n u m b e r i s e n t e r e d t h r e e t i m e s i n a r o w : I f "...
  • Page 199 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 100 of 227 Each entered digit will be displayed as " ". Tap the [OK] key. If the entered user number is authenticated, the number of remaining pages that the user can copy or scan is displayed. When a limitation is set for the number of pages that a user can use, the use count for the user that has logged in is displayed.
  • Page 200 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 101 of 227 When you have finished using the machine and are ready to log out, tap [Logout]. 01-020.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 201 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 102 of 227 AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORD Overview This method enables users to log in using a login name and password received from the administrator of the machine or the administrator of the LDAP server.
  • Page 202 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 103 of 227 I n " S e t t i n g m o d e ( W e b v e r s i o n ) " , s e l e c t [ U s e r C o n t r o l ] → [ D e f a u l t S e t t i n g s ] t o r e l e a s e t h e l o c k .
  • Page 203 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 104 of 227 can be entered the text. Selecting from a list Tap the [Select from List] key and select a user name from the User List screen. L D A P a u t h e n t i c a t i o n i s u s e d w h e n t h e a d m i n i s t r a t o r o f t h e s e r v e r p r o v i d e s L D A P s e r v i c e o n t h e L A N ( l o c a l a r e a n e t w o r k ) .
  • Page 204 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 105 of 227 T o h a v e t h e u s e r n a m e a n d p a s s w o r d r e g i s t e r e d : I n "...
  • Page 205 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 106 of 227 I n " S e t t i n g m o d e " , s e l e c t [ U s e r C o n t r o l ] → [ P a g e L i m i t G r o u p L i s t ] .
  • Page 206 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 107 of 227 01-021.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 207 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 108 of 227 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFT KEYBOARD KEYS Display the soft keyboard to register the name of a file, program, folder or user. T h e s o f t k e y b o a r d s h o w n h e r e i s a n i m a g e f o r y o u r r e f e r e n c e . D i f f e r e n t k e y s m a y b e e n a b l e d d e p e n d i n g o n t h e a c t u a l s i t u a t i o n a n d c o n d i t i o n u n d e r w h i c h y o u e n t e r c h a r a c t e r s .
  • Page 208 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 109 of 227 ECO FUNCTIONS These functions help save power consumption by managing operations of sections prone to high power consumption. The machine provides two power-saving modes. A U T O P O W E R S H U I f n o o p e r a t i o n s a r e t a k i n g p l a c e , t h i s m o d e t u r n s o f f t h e T - O F F T I M E R p o w e r t o t h e o p e r a t i o n p a n e l a n d t h e f u s i n g u n i t , a n d m a...
  • Page 209 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 110 of 227 h e u s a g e o f t h e m a c h i n e d u r i n g a c e r t a i n t i m e p e r i o d . P r i o r i t y i s g i v e n t o p o w e r o n / o f f s c h e d u l i n g f u n c t i o n .
  • Page 210: Preheat Mode

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 111 of 227 PREHEAT MODE This mode lowers the temperature of the fusing unit and makes the machine wait in low power consumption state. Preheat mode will activate when the set duration of time elapses in waiting status without executing a job.
  • Page 211 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 112 of 227 AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF TIMER This mode turns off the power to the operation panel and the fusing unit, and makes the machine wait in the lowest power consumption state.
  • Page 212 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 113 of 227 [Continue] button. The message appears again 15 seconds before the end of the extension of normal operation time. If no action is taken within 15 seconds after the message appears, the machine enters auto power shutoff mode.
  • Page 213 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 114 of 227 AS SOON AS THE REMOTE JOB IS FINISHED, ENTER AUTO POWER SHUT OFF MODE. Printing or outputting received fax data in Auto Power Shut-Off Timer turns on the power, and then the machine returns to Auto Power Shut- Off Timer immediately after completing the print job.
  • Page 214 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 115 of 227 ECO SCAN Non-print jobs such as sending a scanned original are performed with the fusing unit turned off. T o s e t E c o s c a n : I n "...
  • Page 215 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 116 of 227 POWER ON/OFF SCHEDULING FUNCTION Use this function to set the times for turning the power on and off for the machine to reduce power consumption. S e t t i n g P o w e r O N / O F F S c h e d u l i n g F u n c t i o n I n "...
  • Page 216 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 117 of 227 POWER MANAGEMENT SETTING This function controls transition to Auto Power Shut-Off mode optimally for the use frequency by analyzing the usage of the machine during a certain time period. T o e n a b l e t h e p o w e r m a n a g e m e n t s e t t i n g : I n "...
  • Page 217 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 118 of 227 SPECIFIC DATE OPERATION SETTINGS Overview When you must have the machine perform exceptionally many print jobs or other special operation on a certain day, you can specify the day as a "Specific Date"...
  • Page 218: Names And Locations Of Trays

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 119 of 227 NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS 01-024.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 219 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 120 of 227 THE DEFINITION OF "R" IN PAPER SIZE To indicate the landscape setting, "R" is added to the end of the name of a paper size enabled for both landscape and portrait settings. P a p e r t h a t c a n b e s e t e i t h e r i n t h e p o r t r a i t P a p e r t h a t c a n o n l y b e s e t i o r l a n d s c a p e o r i e n t a t i o n...
  • Page 220: Applicable Paper Types

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 121 of 227 APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES This section describes paper types that can be used and those that cannot be used. All types of paper other than plain paper are referred to as special media.
  • Page 221 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 122 of 227 Specifications of plain paper, heavy paper and thin paper • S h a r p s t a n d a r d p a p e r •...
  • Page 222 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 123 of 227 s h e e t p a p e r d r a w e r i s i n s t t p a p e r d r a w e a c i t y t r a a l l e d ) P e r m i t t e d...
  • Page 223 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 124 of 227 P e r m i t t e d P e r m i t t e d P e r P e r m i t t e d C o l o r m i t t P e r...
  • Page 224 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 125 of 227 T r a y s 1 - 4 F a c i n g u p F a c i n g d o w n B y p a s s t r a y a n d t r a F a c i n g d o w n F a c i n g u p y 5 :...
  • Page 225 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 126 of 227 • Japanese paper • Perforated paper 01-026.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 226 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 127 of 227 LOADING PAPER INTO A TRAY Overview Loading paper to Tray 1 - 4 (when a stand/1x500/2x500 sheet paper drawer is installed) A maximum of 500 sheets of paper from size 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R to 11" x 17"...
  • Page 227 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 128 of 227 Adjust guide plates A and B by squeezing their lock levers and sliding them to match the longitudinal and transversal dimensions of the paper to be loaded. The guide plates A and B are slidable. Slide each guide plate while squeezing its lock lever to adjust to the paper size.
  • Page 228 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 129 of 227 Gently push the paper tray into the machine. Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine. 01-027.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 229 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 130 of 227 TRAY 3 - 4 (STAND/2000 SHEET PAPER DRAWER) Overview A maximum of 1,150 sheets of 8-1/2" × 11" (A4) paper can be loaded into tray A maximum of 850 sheets of 8-1/2" × 11" (A4) paper can be loaded into tray I f y o u l o a d e d p a p e r o f a d i f f e r e n t t y p e o r s i z e f r o m t h e p a p e r p r e v i o u s l y l o a d e d , b e s u r e t o c h e c k t h e s e t t i n g s i n "...
  • Page 230 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 131 of 227 Lift the feed roller, and place paper into the tray Load the paper with the print side facing up. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 1,150 sheets for tray 3, or maximum of 850 sheets for tray 4).
  • Page 231 The tray can hold up to 3500 sheets of 8.5" x 11"size paper (21 lbs or 80 g/m When changing the paper size, contact your dealer or SHARP Service Department. D o n o t p l a c e h e a v y o b j e c t s o n t h e t r a y o r p r e s s d o w n o n t h e t r a y .
  • Page 232 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 133 of 227 Place the paper in the center of the paper table. Load the paper with the print side facing down. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 3500 sheets).
  • Page 233 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 134 of 227 01-028.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 234: Loading Paper Into The Bypass Tray

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 135 of 227 LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY Overview Use the bypass tray for printing on plain paper, envelopes, label sheets, tab paper, and other special media. Up to 100 sheets of paper can be loaded (Heavy paper weighing between 28 lbs and 140 lbs: 40 sheets, heavy paper weighing between 140 lbs and 110 lbs: 20 sheets) for continuous printing, just like operation using other trays.
  • Page 235 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 136 of 227 Loading tab paper To print on tab paper, load tab paper into the bypass tray with the print side facing down. • U s e o n l y t a b p a p e r t h a t i s m a d e o f p a p e r . T a b p a p e r m a d e o f a m a t e r i a l o t h e r t h a n p a p e r ( f i l m , e t c .
  • Page 236 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 137 of 227 • W h e n p r i n t i n g o n t r a n s p a r e n c y f i l m , r e m o v e e a c h s h e e t a s i t i s p r i n t e d a n d o u t p u t f r o m t h e m a c h i n e .
  • Page 237 Important points when using embossed paper/label sheets • The effect of asperity surfaces of embossed paper may affect the print quality depending on the type of embossed paper. For more information, consult the dealer or "SHARP Service Department". file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 238 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 139 of 227 • Some labels may have to be loaded into the bypass tray in the specified orientation. Follow such instructions. If a form is already printed on the labels, and the print images and the preprinted form do not line up, adjust the application or printer driver settings to rotate the print images.
  • Page 239 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 140 of 227 Load the paper with the print side facing down. Insert the paper along the bypass tray guides all the way into the bypass tray until it stops. F o r " L e t t e r H e a d " a n d " P r e - P r i n t e d " , s e t t h e p a p e r w i t h t h e p r i n t s i d e u p .
  • Page 240 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 141 of 227 SELECTING A PROCEDURE FOR PLACING THE ORIGINAL DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND STATUS OF THE ORIGINAL Place the original in the automatic document feeder. Depending the type and status of the original, use the document glass. Follow the instructions to select the method for placing the original.
  • Page 241 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 142 of 227 Set [Slow Scan Mode] in "Others". For this type, 2-sided scanning is disabled. • Original with two or three filing holes Place the original so that the punched edge does not fall on the feed slot of the document feeder tray.
  • Page 242 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 143 of 227 LOADING PAPER INTO THE LONG PAPER FEEDING TRAY The steps for attaching the optional long paper feeding tray to the bypass tray are explained below. Extend the auxiliary guide of the long paper feeding tray. Pull out the extension guide of the bypass tray.
  • Page 243 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 144 of 227 Replace the extension guide of the bypass tray. 01-029_1.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 244: Automatic Document Feeder

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 145 of 227 AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Overview This section explains how to place originals in the automatic document feeder. • P l a c e o r i g i n a l s o f d i f f e r e n t s i z e s t o g e t h e r , i f n e e d e d , i n t h e a u t o m a t i c d o c u m e n t f e e d e r .
  • Page 245 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 146 of 227 Allowed original sizes M i n i m u m o r i g i n a l s i z e M a x i m u m o r i g i n a l s i z e S t a n d a r d s i z e S t a n d a r d s i z e ( M i n i m u m s i z e t h a t c a n b e a u t o m a t i...
  • Page 246 Operation Make sure that there is no original on the document glass. Place the original. MX-4140N/MX-5140N: Up to 100 sheets can be inserted. MX-4141N/MX-5141N: Up to 150 sheets can be inserted. After scanning is finished on the automatic document feeder, remove originals from the original exit tray.
  • Page 247 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 148 of 227 01-030.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 248 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 149 of 227 DOCUMENT GLASS Overview This section describes the steps for setting the original on the document glass. • C l o s e t h e a u t o m a t i c d o c u m e n t f e e d e r s l o w l y . A b r u p t l y c l o s i n g t h e a u t o m a t i c d o c u m e n t f e e d e r m a y d a m a g e i t .
  • Page 249 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 150 of 227 2 9 7 m m ( l o n g i t u d i n a l ) x 4 2 0 m m ( t r a n s v e r s a l ) o r A 3 N o n - s t a n d a r d s i z e 1 1 - 5 / 8 "...
  • Page 250 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 151 of 227 W h e n p l a c i n g a n o n - s t a n d a r d s i z e o r i g i n a l o n t h e d o c u m e n t g l a s s , t h e s i z e c a n b e d e t e c t e d e a s i l y i f a b l a n k s h e e t o f 8 - 1 / 2 "...
  • Page 251: Address Book

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 152 of 227 ADDRESS BOOK "Contacts" and "Group" can be stored in the address book. For a contact, more than one address can be stored, including fax, e- mail, Internet fax and direct SMTP addresses. Registering addresses stored as "Contacts"...
  • Page 252: Address Book Screen

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 153 of 227 ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN To display the address book, tap the [Address Book] key on the base screen in image send mode such as fax, e-mail, or Internet fax. You can also display it by tapping the [Address Book] icon on the Home screen.
  • Page 253 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 154 of 227 After selection, tap To add Contacts and Groups, refer to the following. Narrowing by category Tap the [Search by Category] key to select a category on the screen that appears.
  • Page 254 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 155 of 227 Narrowing by job type Tap the [Search by Job Type] key to select a job on the screen that appears. To narrow by "Group", tap the [Group] key. After the settings are completed, tap The "Contacts"...
  • Page 255 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 156 of 227 Narrowing by keyword to display a search screen. Select a target for search, enter a keyword and then tap the [Start Search] key. The search results are listed. For example, if [Item] is [Name], search with a keyword "SH"...
  • Page 256 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 157 of 227 Tapping the [Switch Display] key displays a list in ascending order, descending order, or in the order of search numbers. The display is switched in the order of [Switch Display] (▲) (Up) → [Switch Display] (▼) (Down) →[Search Number Order].
  • Page 257 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 158 of 227 STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY Store new names or addresses in the address book by directly entering them. Operation In the address book screen, tap the [Register/Edit Address] key on the action panel, or tap the [Register/Edit Address in Address Book] icon in the home screen.
  • Page 258 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 159 of 227 I f u s e r a u t h e n t i c a t i o n i s e n a b l e d , t h e t a b f o r a d d r e s s p u b l i c a t i o n s e t t i n g a p p e a r s .
  • Page 259 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 160 of 227 Tap the [Add Address Below] key. Tap the [Finish Direct Input.] key on the action panel Tap the [End Registration] key on the action panel If [Set as Default used] is not checked for any address, a confirmation screen is displayed to ask you whether to select the default address.
  • Page 260 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 161 of 227 STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH Overview Store the results of searching the global address book as new addresses in the address book. G l o b a l a d d r e s s s e a r c h r e q u i r e s a n L D A P s e r v e r . Operation In the address book screen, tap the [Register/Edit Address] key on the action panel, or tap the [Register/Edit...
  • Page 261 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 162 of 227 T o r e g i s t e r a c a t e g o r y n a m e : I n " S e t t i n g m o d e " , s e l e c t [ A d d r e s s B o o k ] → [ C a t e g o r y S e t t i n g s ] . I f u s e r a u t h e n t i c a t i o n i s e n a b l e d , t h e t a b f o r a d d r e s s p u b l i c a t i o n s e t t i n g a p p e a r s .
  • Page 262 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 163 of 227 To change the search target, tap for [Item]. You can select [Name] or [Address/Number]. Select one address from the search result list and tap the [Enter] key on the action panel. T o c h e c k a d d r e s s i n f o r m a t i o n , s e l e c t t h e a d d r e s s a n d t a p t h e [ C o n f i r m A d d r e s s I n f o r m a t i o n ] k e y o n t h e a c t i o n p a n e l .
  • Page 263 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 164 of 227 STORING ADDRESSES FROM FAX OR IMAGE SEND LOGS Overview As a new registration, add an address you have entered via fax or image send operations to the address book. F T P a n d d e s k t o p a d d r e s s e s c a n n o t b e s t o r e d i n t h e a d d r e s s b o o k f r o m t r a n s m i s s i o n l o g s .
  • Page 264 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 165 of 227 T o r e g i s t e r a c a t e g o r y n a m e : I n " S e t t i n g m o d e " , s e l e c t [ A d d r e s s B o o k ] → [ C a t e g o r y S e t t i n g ] . Tap the [End Registration] key on the action panel The address is registered in the address book and the transmission log screen is restored.
  • Page 265 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 166 of 227 STORING GROUPS Register "Group" by selecting addresses from those already stored as "Contacts". In this case of registration, only reference to addresses already stored takes place, and so, the total number of registered addresses (maximum 6000) in the address book does not increase.
  • Page 266 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 167 of 227 T o d i r e c t l y e n t e r a n e w a d d r e s s f o r a " G r o u p " , t a p t h e [ E n t e r A d d r e s s D i r e c t l y ] k e y o n t h e a c t i o n p a n e l .
  • Page 267 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 168 of 227 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to register addresses. After address registration is completed, tap the [Enter and Return.] key on the action panel. Tap the [End Registration] key on the action panel 01-074.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 268 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 169 of 227 EDITING/DELETING ADDRESSES IN ADDRESS BOOK You can edit or delete "Contacts" or "Group" information stored in the address book as well as addresses listed under "Contacts" and "Group". •...
  • Page 269 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 170 of 227 • F o r d e l e t i n g , y o u c a n s e l e c t m o r e t h a n o n e " C o n t a c t s " o r "...
  • Page 270 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 171 of 227 In the address book screen, tap the [Register/Edit Address] key on the action panel, or tap the [Register/Edit Address in Address Book] icon in the home screen. Select a "Contacts" or "Group", and tap the [Edit] key on the action panel.
  • Page 271 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 172 of 227 • T o e d i t o r d e l e t e , y o u c a n o n l y s e l e c t o n e a d d r e s s a t a t i m e . •...
  • Page 272 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 173 of 227 SETTING THE SCOPE FOR PUBLICIZING CONTACTS AND GROUPS Overview "Contacts" and "Group" stored in the address book can be shared within a specified group or stored as personal contacts that only you are allowed to access.
  • Page 273 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 174 of 227 Limiting the scope to the user In the address registration screen, tap the [Public Address Setting] tab and then tap the [Designate Public Address.] key. Check that the [User List] is checked and your user name is selected.
  • Page 274 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 175 of 227 In the address registration screen, tap the [Public Address Setting] tab and then tap the [Designate Public Address.] key. Tap the [Organization/Group] tab and select a user group to which you want to open addresses.
  • Page 275 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 176 of 227 BILLING CODE Overview A billing code, which is added to a recorded job log when a print or send job has been executed, is used to perform billing processing. Billing codes are classified into two types: main code and sub code.
  • Page 276 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 177 of 227 w h e n t h e c u s t o m e r n a m e i s a s s i g n e d t o t h e m a i n c o d e . C o d e e x a m p l e : I s s u e o f A p r i l , 2 0 1 4 U s e C o d e A u t o m a t i c a l l y a s s i g n e d w h e n t h e m a i n c o d e o r s u b c o d e...
  • Page 277 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 178 of 227 USING A BILLING CODE Overview If the use of billing code is enabled in "Setting Mode (Administrator", the billing code entry window is displayed at the time of mode transition (at the time of printing/sending in document filing mode).
  • Page 278 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 179 of 227 • REGISTERING A NEW BILLING CODE When the billing code entry window is displayed, tap the [Select from List] key of the main code. W h e n n o t s p e c i f y i n g a b i l l i n g c o d e T a p t h e [ N o U s e o f B i l l i n g C o d e ] k e y .
  • Page 279 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 180 of 227 m a i n c o d e n a m e , t h e n t a p t h e [ S t a r t S e a r c h ] k e y . T h e s e a r c h r e s u l t l i s t i s d i s p l a y e d .
  • Page 280 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 181 of 227 Tap the [OK] key T o c l e a r t h e v a l u e o f t h e s p e c i f i e d b i l l i n g c o d e T a p t h e [ C A ] k e y .
  • Page 281 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 182 of 227 Tap the [OK] key T o c l e a r t h e v a l u e o f t h e s p e c i f i e d b i l l i n g c o d e T a p t h e [ C A ] k e y .
  • Page 282 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 183 of 227 REGISTERING A NEW BILLING CODE Overview Register a new billing code. A billing code can be registered not only from the billing code entry window but also from "Setting Mode". T o r e g i s t e r a b i l l i n g c o d e f r o m S e t t i n g M o d e S e l e c t "...
  • Page 283 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 184 of 227 Tap the [Add/Edit Billing Code] key on the action panel Tap the [Add New] key on the action panel. T o r e t u r n t o t h e b i l l i n g c o d e s e l e c t i o n w i n d o w T a p Tap the text box of [Main Code], then type in the main code.
  • Page 284 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 185 of 227 Tap the text box of [Main Code Name], then type in the main code name. Specify the code name using up to 32 double- or single-byte characters. If necessary, select the share range of billing code. Public to All: Registers the billing code as a public code for all users who use the machine.
  • Page 285 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 186 of 227 Tap and select a group as a public destination Up to eight groups can be specified. After the setting has been completed, T o c a n c e l t h e s e t t i n g T a p t h e [ C l e a r ] k e y o n t h e a c t i o n p a n e l .
  • Page 286 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 187 of 227 EDITING OR DELETING THE REGISTERED BILLING CODE Overview You can change or delete the registered billing code. • Editing a billing code • Deleting a billing code The billing code can also be edited or deleted from "Setting Mode". T o e d i t o r r e g i s t e r a b i l l i n g c o d e f r o m S e t t i n g M o d e S e l e c t "...
  • Page 287 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 188 of 227 Tap the [Add/Edit Billing Code] key on the action panel Tap and select the main code to be edited, then tap the [Edit] key on the action panel. T o r e t u r n t o t h e b i l l i n g c o d e s e l e c t i o n w i n d o w T a p Edit the main code as required...
  • Page 288 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 189 of 227 Tap the [End Registration] key on the action panel. This finalizes the registration and returns the screen to the previous window. Tap to finish the registration procedure. T o r e t u r n t o t h e b i l l i n g c o d e e n t r y w i n d o w T a p t h e [ C A ] k e y .
  • Page 289 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 190 of 227 Tap and select the main code to be deleted, then tap the [Delete] key on the action panel. T o r e t u r n t o t h e b i l l i n g c o d e s e l e c t i o n w i n d o w T a p When the confirmation message appears, tap the [Delete] key.
  • Page 290: Remote Operation Of The Machine

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 191 of 227 REMOTE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE Overview Remotely operate the machine on your computer. You can operate the machine from the same panel as the machine's operation panel that is displayed on your PC, with the same feel as operating in front of the machine.
  • Page 291 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 192 of 227 After the preparation is completed, follow the operation described below to set up the function. Example: RealVNC Start the VNC viewer. Enter the IP address of the machine in the "Server" entry box.
  • Page 292 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 193 of 227 T o s e t t h e o p e r a t i o n a l a u t h o r i t y f o r t h e r e m o t e o p e r a t i o n f u n c t i o n : I n "...
  • Page 293 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 194 of 227 BROWSING WEB PAGES ON THE TOUCH PANEL When the [Web Browse] key is displayed on the home screen, tapping the key will allow you to access the Internet and displays Web pages on the touch panel.
  • Page 294: Menu List

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 195 of 227 Menu List to display the menu list. The following shows the items of the menu list. O p e n s t h e p r i n t d i a l o g . P r i n t D e p e n d i n g o n t h e W e b p a g e , p a r t o f t h e p a g e m a y n o t b e p r i n t e d .
  • Page 295 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 196 of 227 p l a y e d o r e n a b l e d . T h e d i s p l a y s e t t i n g s o f t h e f o l l o w i n g i t e m s c a n b e c h a n g e d .
  • Page 296: Viewing Pdf Files

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 197 of 227 For the model equipped with a Web browsing kit as standard, the Web browser icon is displayed in the home screen. Viewing PDF Files When a Web page includes a link to a PDF file, you can display the PDF file by tapping the link.
  • Page 297 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 198 of 227 F i t s t h e P D F p a g e t o t h e w i d t h o f t h e v i e w a r e a . F i t W i d t h D i s p l a y s a w h o l e P D F p a g e .
  • Page 298 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 199 of 227 P D F P D F 1 . 3 / 1 . 4 / 1 . 5 / 1 . 6 S o m e f o r m a t s m a y n o t b e d i s p l a y e d o r p r i n t e d . F l a s h A d o b e ( R ) F l a s h ( R ) L i t e ( T M ) 3 .
  • Page 299 A p p l i c a t i o n s S e t t i n g s ] → [ S t a n d a r d A p p l i c a t i o n s ] . Operation Tap the [Sharp OSA] key on the Home screen. If no standard applications have been stored, the key cannot be tapped.
  • Page 300 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 201 of 227 Connect the machine to the standard application. The message "Connecting to the external application." appears while the machine communicates with the standard application. 01-042.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 301: External Account Application Setup

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 202 of 227 EXTERNAL ACCOUNT The external account module enables you to use an "external account application" for centralized account management of a n MFP on a network. • External account application setup •...
  • Page 302: External Account Application

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 203 of 227 The following describes operation in the two modes for using an external account application. External authentication mode When the machine is powered on in external authentication mode, the machine accesses the external account application and displays the login screen.
  • Page 303 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 204 of 227 I f t e r m i n a t i o n i n S e t t i n g m o d e ( W e b v e r s i o n ) f a i l s , t e r m i n a t e i t f o r c i b l y o n t h e o p e r a t i o n p a n e l o f t h e m a c h i n e .
  • Page 304: Setting Procedure

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 205 of 227 CARD SOLUTION KIT This section explains the settings and login procedure for CAC authentication using the MX-EC50 (Card Solution Kit), and the functions that can be accessed used when using CAC authentication. •...
  • Page 305 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 206 of 227 T o l o g o u t . . . • W h e n y o u h a v e f i n i s h e d u s i n g t h e m a c h i n e a n d a r e r e a d y t o l o g o u t , t a p [ L o g o u t ] .
  • Page 306: Page Menu

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 207 of 227 Create / Register a card holder user, who has a CAC card. Enter a User Name. Example: "Card Holder" Enter an Initial. Example: "CH" Select the authority group ("Card Holder Authority") as set up in step 3.
  • Page 307 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 208 of 227 Select the [User Selection] button. Select the CAC user ("Card Holder") selected in step 6. A pop up window will be displayed. Select [confirmation], then select [OK]. Click the [Submit] button. Y o u c a n e a s i l y s e t u p t h e U s e r R e g i s t r a t i o n a n d A u t h o r i t y G r o u p R e g i s t r a t i o n i n U s e r C o n t r o l S e t t i n g s b y i m p o r t i n g t h e S a m p l e U s e r R e g i s t r a t i o n F i l e ( "...
  • Page 308 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 209 of 227 Other items are set to default settings Make sure that "Display only the Files of Logged-in Users" is set to "Allowed", and then click the [Submit] button. U n d e r [ S y s t e m S e t t i n g s ] t a b i t i s r e c o m m e n d e d t o m a k e s u r e t h a t t h e "...
  • Page 309 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 210 of 227 A pop up window will be displayed. Select [confirmation],then select [OK]. Click the [Submit] button. Y o u c a n e a s i l y s e t u p t h e U s e r R e g i s t r a t i o n a n d A u t h o r i t y G r o u p R e g i s t r a t i o n i n t h e D e v i c e A c c e s s M o d e s e t t i n g b y i m p o r t i n g t h e S a m p l e U s e r R e g i s t r a t i o n F i l e ( "...
  • Page 310 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 211 of 227 E - m a i l t o S e l f O n l y S p e c i f y w h e t h e r o r n o t " S c a n t o S e l f " i s e n a b l e d . S p e c i f y w h e t h e r o r n o t "...
  • Page 311 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 212 of 227 S p e c i f y w h e t h e r o r n o t " S i g n E - m a i l "...
  • Page 312 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 213 of 227 t e d , t h e m a x i m u m a l l o w e d n u m b e r o f r e c i p i e n t s m a y d e c r e a s e . CAC Configuration Settings Specify CAC related configuration settings.
  • Page 313 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 214 of 227 Install all certificates in the trust chain of the CA certificate that issued the user certificate. On your computer, prepare the certificate file that you wish to install. Click the [Import] button in "Security Settings"...
  • Page 314 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 215 of 227 Install all certificates in the trust chain of CA certificate which issued the OCSP signature certificate. Follow the procedure in Step 1 to install the OCSP signature certificate. Set the URL of the OCSP responder.
  • Page 315 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 216 of 227 When Device Account Mode is not used, or when only Card Holder can access MFP. The above login screen will appear to let you perform the login procedure. Users with a CAC card should insert their card to login. When Device Account Mode is used, or when Card Holder and Site Guest can access the MFP.
  • Page 316 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 217 of 227 • S y s t e m S e t t i n g s ( A d m i n i s t r a t o r ) : C A C C o n f i g u r a t i o n S e t t i n g s T h i s s e t s t h e C A C c a r d a u t h e n t i c a t i o n m e t h o d .
  • Page 317 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 218 of 227 p a r t o f t h e C a r d f u n c t i o n a l i t y n o t t h e M F P . F o r t h e e x a c t n u m b e r o f a t t e m p t s p l e a s e c o n s u l t y o u r a d m i n i s t r a t o r ) .
  • Page 318 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 219 of 227 W e b p a g e m e n u . ( A d m i n i s t r a t o r r i g h t s a r e r e q u i r e d . ) F o r d e t a i l s , s e e "...
  • Page 319 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 220 of 227 Tap the [HDD File retrieve]. Tap the key of the folder that contains the desired file. Select the file to print from the folder where the job was sent.
  • Page 320 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 221 of 227 r e q u i r e d . ) F o r d e t a i l s , s e e " " E - m a i l t o S e l f o n l y " a n d " A l l o w S i t e E - m a i l A d d r e s s " "...
  • Page 321 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 222 of 227 Tap to enable Sign E-mail. If "Sign E-mail" is enabled in "Sign / Encrypt E-mail Setting", this is fixed in the selected state. Sign / Encrypt E-mail Setting (3) [Encrypt E-mail] key Tap to enable Encrypt E-mail.
  • Page 322 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 223 of 227 This section describes Document Filing functions only related to CAC authentication. For other details about the Document Filing function, "DOCUMENT FILING". Operation when CAC authentication is used When CAC authentication is used and "Force Retention" in the CAC configuration settings is enabled, all print jobs are stored in the main folder.
  • Page 323 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 224 of 227 File manipulation When "Scan to Self" or "Scan to Site" is enabled in "E-mail Setting" in the system settings (administrator), the only option that can be used when "Send" is selected for the operation is "Scan to Self" or "Scan to Site".
  • Page 324 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 225 of 227 Clearing all Data If you need to clear all memory and saved files for example at the end of life please follow these steps: Log in as an administrator. Select [System settings].
  • Page 325: Removing Misfeeds

    USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 226 of 227 REMOVING MISFEEDS Overview If a paper misfeed occurs, the "Paper Jam" message will appear in the touch panel and printing and scanning will stop. In this event, tap the [Check how to remove misfeeds] key in the touch panel. When the key is tapped, instructions for removing the misfeed will appear.
  • Page 326 USER'S MANUAL - OPERATIONS COMMON TO ALL MODES Page 227 of 227 01-044.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 327 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 1 of 231 Digital full-color multifunction machine MX-4140N/MX- 4141N/MX-5140N/MX-5141N PRINTING "COPY" file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 328 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 2 of 231 SELECTING COPY MODE Follow the steps below to change from the Home Screen or each mode to copy mode. Operation Changing modes from the Home Screen Tap the [Copy] mode icon The initial copy mode screen is displayed. Changing mode from each mode Tap on the mode display Tap [Copy]...
  • Page 329: Base Screen Of Copy Mode

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 3 of 231 BASE SCREEN OF COPY MODE T h e d i s p l a y e d c o n t e n t s o f t h e a b o v e s c r e e n w i l l v a r y d e p e n d i n g o n t h e d e v i c e s i n s t a l l e d .
  • Page 330: Copying Sequence

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 4 of 231 COPYING SEQUENCE First, tap the [Copy] icon on the home screen to enter the Copy mode. • SELECTING COPY MODE Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
  • Page 331 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 5 of 231 Check the preview image. Display the preview image of the scanned original. in the preview screen, check the settings such as color, 2-sided copy, or staple position. Start copying. Tap the [Color Start] or [B/W Start] key. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies.
  • Page 332 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 6 of 231 T a p t h e c o p i e s d i s p l a y k e y t o s p e c i f y t h e n u m b e r o f c o p i e s .
  • Page 333 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 7 of 231 COPY PREVIEW If you tap the [Preview] key before scanning the original, you can check the status of the scanned image in the preview screen. While viewing the preview screen, you can adjust the exposure or color, and configure the preview in your image.
  • Page 334: Checking The Original Size

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 8 of 231 CHECKING THE ORIGINAL SIZE Check the size of the placed original on the display of the [Original] key. If the original size is set to [Auto], the automatically detected size (standard size ) is displayed on the [Original] key.
  • Page 335 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 9 of 231 I n c h - 2 1 1 " x 1 7 " , 8 - 1 / 2 " x 1 3 " ( 2 1 6 1 1 " x 1 7 " , 8 - 1 / 2 " x 1 3 " ( 2 1 6 m m m m x 3 3 0 m m ) , 8 - 1 / 2 "...
  • Page 336 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 10 of 231 p l a c i n g a b l a n k s h e e t o f 8 - 1 / 2 " x 1 1 " ( A 4 ) , 5 - 1 / 2 " x 8 - 1 / 2 " ( B 5 ) , o r o t h e r s t a n d a r d s i z e o f p a p e r o n t o p o f t h e o r i g i n a l .
  • Page 337 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 11 of 231 T o s e t R o t a t i o n C o p y : I n " S e t t i n g m o d e " , s e l e c t [ S y s t e m S e t t i n g s ] → [ C o p y S e t t i n g s ] → [ R o t a t i o n C o p y S e t t i n g ] .
  • Page 338 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 12 of 231 SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING Overview The machine is set to automatically select a tray that has the same size of paper as the size of the placed original (automatic paper tray selection).
  • Page 339 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 13 of 231 Y o u c a n a l s o c a l l t h e [ P a p e r S e l e c t ] s c r e e n b y t a p p i n g t h e m a c h i n e i m a g e o n t h e b a s e s c r e e n .
  • Page 340 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 14 of 231 USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR COPYING Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Preview] key. • AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Check the paper to be used and the color mode. Make sure that the desired paper (tray) and color mode are selected.
  • Page 341 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 15 of 231 Tap the [Color Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. T o m a k e t w o o r m o r e s e t s o f c o p i e s : T a p t h e c o p i e s d i s p l a y k e y t o s p e c i f y t h e n u m b e r o f c o p i e s .
  • Page 342 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 16 of 231 USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR COPYING Place the original on the document glass, and tap the [Preview] key. • DOCUMENT GLASS Set the next original, and tap the [Additionally Scan] key to scan the original.
  • Page 343 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 17 of 231 Tap the [Color Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. T o m a k e t w o o r m o r e s e t s o f c o p i e s : T a p t h e c o p i e s d i s p l a y k e y t o s p e c i f y t h e n u m b e r o f c o p i e s .
  • Page 344 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 18 of 231 USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR 2-SIDED COPYING Overview • T o m a k e 2 - s i d e d c o p i e s , c o n f i g u r e t h e 2 - s i d e d c o p y s e t t i n g s b e f o r e s c a n n i n g t h e o r i g i n a l .
  • Page 345 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 19 of 231 T o m a k e 2 - s i d e d c o p i e s o f a 1 - s i d e d p o r t r a i t o r i g i n a l p l a c e d h o r i z o n t a l l y , o r t o i n v e r t t h e r e v e r s e s i d e w i t h r e s p e c t t o t h e f r o n t s i d e w h e n c o p y i n g a 2 - s i d e d o r i g i n a l , s e t t h e [ R o t a t e b a c k f a c e 1 8 0 d e g ] c h e c k b o x t o...
  • Page 346: The Number Of Copies

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 20 of 231 D e p e n d i n g o n t h e s i z e o f t h e p l a c e d o r i g i n a l , t h e r e m a y b e c a s e s w h e r e t h e s a m e s i z e o f p a p e r a s t h e o r i g i n a l i s n o t s e l e c t e d a u t o m a t i c a l l y .
  • Page 347 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 21 of 231 USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR 2-SIDED COPYING Overview D u a l - s i d e c o p y h e l p s t o s a v e p a p e r . T o c h a n g e t h e d e f a u l t 2 - s i d e d c o p y m o d e : I n "...
  • Page 348 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 22 of 231 Place the original on the document glass, and tap the [Preview] key. • DOCUMENT GLASS T h e [ 2 - S i d e d - > 2 - S i d e d ] k e y a n d [ 1 - S i d e d - > 2 - S i d e d ] k e y c a n n o t b e u s e d w h e n c o p y i n g f r o m t h e d o c u m e n t g l a s s .
  • Page 349 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 23 of 231 D e p e n d i n g o n t h e s i z e o f t h e p l a c e d o r i g i n a l , t h e r e m a y b e c a s e s w h e r e t h e s a m e s i z e o f p a p e r a s t h e o r i g i n a l i s n o t s e l e c t e d a u t o m a t i c a l l y .
  • Page 350: Interrupt Copy

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 24 of 231 INTERRUPT COPY Overview This function suspends a job in progress, and preferentially prints the original specified with interrupt copy. When you need to make an urgent copy and the machine is busy with a long copy run or other job, use interrupt copy.
  • Page 351 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 25 of 231 I f u s e r a u t h e n t i c a t i o n i s e n a b l e d t a p t h e [ I n t e r r u p t ] k e y t o d i s p l a y t h e u s e r a u t h e n t i c a t i o n s c r e e n . E n t e r t h e u s e r n a m e a n d p a s s w o r d t o p e r f o r m u s e r a u t h e n t i c a t i o n .
  • Page 352 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 26 of 231 02-067.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 353 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 27 of 231 SEND DATA WHILE COPYING Overview This function allows you to send a fax while making a copy, send an e -mail with an image attached, or save data in the network folder. Y o u n e e d t o s t o r e t h e d e s t i n a t i o n i n t h e a d d r e s s b o o k i n a d v a n c e .
  • Page 354 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 28 of 231 Select a recipient from the address book. • ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN After you have selected the recipient, tap the [Enter Address] key. Y o u c a n n o t u s e t h e s o f t k e y b o a r d t o e n t e r a n a d d r e s s . I f y o u c a n n o t f i n d t h e r e c i p i e n t i n t h e a d d r e s s b o o k , e n t e r i t i n t h e a d d r e s s b o o k .
  • Page 355 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 29 of 231 Y o u c a n p r e v i e w t h e s c a n n e d o r i g i n a l b y t a p p i n g t h e [ P r e v i e w ] k e y . Tap the [Color Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying.
  • Page 356: Single Color

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 30 of 231 COPY COLOR MODES Overview Select the color mode from Auto, Full Color, Black & White, 2 Color, and Single Color. 2 Color The original is copied in two colors by changing a specific color used in the original to another color.
  • Page 357 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 31 of 231 Operation • Automatically detecting the original color for copying • Copying in full color • Copying in black and white • Copying in two colors • Copying in single color Automatically detecting the original color for copying The machine automatically detects whether each original is color or black &...
  • Page 358 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 32 of 231 Check that the specified color mode is selected. Copying in black and white Tap the [Color Mode] key. Tap the [B/W] key. After the settings are completed, tap Check that the specified color mode is selected. Copying in two colors The original is copied in two colors by changing a specific color to another color.
  • Page 359 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 33 of 231 Tap the key of the color to be extracted to specify the extract color. • [Except Black]: Extracts black parts in an original, and changes non-black parts to the specified color. • [Reddish Color]: Extracts reddish parts in an original, and changes them to the specified color.
  • Page 360 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 34 of 231 Tap the [Single Color] key. Tap the [Change] key. Tap a color you wish to use. After the settings are completed, tap the key on the [Single Color] screen, and check that the changed setting is displayed at the side of [Single Color] key on the color mode screen.
  • Page 361 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 35 of 231 AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE Automatic exposure adjustment operates by default to automatically adjust the exposure level and original type as appropriate for the original being copied. ("Auto" is displayed.) This function automatically adjusts the image during black &...
  • Page 362 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 36 of 231 MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE Overview This section explains how to select the original type depending on the original to be copied or manually adjust the exposure. • T o c h a n g e t h e d e f a u l t e x p o s u r e : I n "...
  • Page 363 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 37 of 231 Original image type select keys I t e m D e s c r i p t i o n T e x t U s e t h i s m o d e f o r r e g u l a r t e x t d o c u m e n t s . T e x t / P r i n t e d P h o t T h i s m o d e p r o v i d e s t h e b e s t b a l a n c e f o r c o p y i n g a n o r i g i n a l w h i c h c o n t a i n s b o t h t e x t a n d p r i n t e d p h o t o g r a p h s , s...
  • Page 364 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 38 of 231 [ C o p y o f C o p y ] i s a v a i l a b l e w h e n [ T e x t ] , [ P r i n t e d P h o t o ] , o r [ T e x t / P r i n t e d P h o t o ] i s s e l e c t e d a s t h e o r i g i n a l i m a g e t y p e .
  • Page 365 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 39 of 231 1 t o 2 : D a r k o r i g i n a l s s u c h a s a n e w s p a p e r 3 : N o r m a l d e n s i t y o r i g i n a l s 4 t o 5 : O r i g i n a l s w r i t t e n i n p e n c i l o r l i g h t c o l o r e d t e x t 02-012.htm...
  • Page 366: Automatic Ratio Selection

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 40 of 231 AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION Overview This section explains how to automatically select the appropriate ratio to meet the paper size when manually changing the paper tray to make a copy on paper that has a size different from the original. F o r a n o n - s t a n d a r d s i z e o r i g i n a l , t h e s i z e m u s t b e e n t e r e d i n o r d e r t o u s e A u t o M a g n i f i c a t i o n S e l e c t i o n .
  • Page 367 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 41 of 231 Tap the [Auto Image] key on the action panel. The reduction or enlargement ratio is automatically selected based on the original size and the selected paper size. The automatically selected ratio will appear in the ratio display. •...
  • Page 368: Manual Ratio Selection

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 42 of 231 MANUAL RATIO SELECTION Overview This section explains how to specify any ratio when making a copy on paper that has a size different from the original or changing the image size for copying. The following three methods can be used to specify the ratio.
  • Page 369: Specifying The Paper Size

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 43 of 231 horizontal sizes, enter either one of the vertical and horizontal sizes. W h e n t h e a u t o m a t i c d o c u m e n t f e e d e r i s u s e d , t h e v e r t i c a l a n d h o r i z o n t a l r a t i o s e l e c t i o n r a n g e s a r e b o t h b e t w e e n 2 5 % t o 2 0 0 % .
  • Page 370 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 44 of 231 Tap the [Copy Ratio] key. Tap the preset ratio key or key to set the ratio. After the settings are completed, tap Check that a paper size suitable for the ratio is selected. •...
  • Page 371 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 45 of 231 Specifying the paper size Tap the [Copy Ratio] key. Tap the [by Paper] key of the [Zoom] tab. Specify the original size (paper size of the loaded original) and the copy size (paper size of the output result). After the settings are completed, tap In the preview screen, check whether or not settings produce the required results.
  • Page 372 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 46 of 231 T o c a n c e l a l l s e t t i n g s : T a p t h e [ C A ] k e y . Specifying the image dimensions Tap the [Copy Ratio] key.
  • Page 373 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 47 of 231 • I f y o u h a v e e n t e r e d a n i n c o r r e c t s i z e : T a p t h e [ C ] k e y , a n d t h e n e n t e r t h e c o r r e c t s i z e .
  • Page 374 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 48 of 231 ENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH AND WIDTH SEPARATELY Overview This section explains how to individually specify the horizontal and vertical copy ratios. When 50% is selected for the horizontal ratio and 70% is selected for the vertical ratio The following two methods can be used to specify the ratio.
  • Page 375 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 49 of 231 Operation • Using the preset ratio key • Specifying the image dimensions Using the preset ratio key Tap the [Copy Ratio] key, and then tap the [XY Zoom] key. Tap the [X] key, and set the X (horizontal) ratio. •...
  • Page 376 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 50 of 231 Check that a paper size suitable for the ratio is selected. Specifying the image dimensions Tap the [Copy Ratio] key, and then tap the [XY Zoom] key. Tap the [by Size] key. Specify the X and Y dimensions of the image size and those of the output size.
  • Page 377 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 51 of 231 02-015.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 378: Specifying The Original Size

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 52 of 231 SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE Overview When the original size is a non-standard size or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size. S e t a n o r i g i n a l s i z e b e f o r e s c a n n i n g t h e o r i g i n a l . Operation •...
  • Page 379 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 53 of 231 Specifying an AB original size Tap the [Original] key. Tap the [AB] tab. Tap the appropriate original size key. After the settings are completed, tap Specifying a non-standard original size file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 380 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 54 of 231 Tap the [Original] key. Tap the [Direct Entry] tab. Specify the original size. • T a p t h e a r e a s d i s p l a y i n g w i d t h a n d h e i g h t s i z e s r e s p e c t i v e l y , a n d e n t e r t h e s i z e s u s i n g t h e n u m e r i c k e y s .
  • Page 381: Storing Frequently Used Original Sizes

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 55 of 231 STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES Overview Store the frequently used non-standard original sizes. This section explains how to store, retrieve, change, and delete non-standard original sizes. • T h e s t o r e d o r i g i n a l s i z e w i l l b e r e t a i n e d e v e n i f t h e m a i n p o w e r i s t u r n e d o f f .
  • Page 382 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 56 of 231 Tap a key ) for storing a custom original size. Tap a key that does not show a size. T o e d i t o r c l e a r a p r e v i o u s l y s t o r e d k e y : file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 383 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 57 of 231 T a p t h e k e y t h a t y o u w a n t t o e d i t o r c l e a r . T h e f o l l o w i n g s c r e e n w i l l a p p e a r .
  • Page 384 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 58 of 231 Tap the [Execute] key. After the settings are completed, tap the key, and check that the key of the size stored on the original screen is added properly. After you have checked it, tap T o c a n c e l t h e o p e r a t i o n T a p t h e [ C A ] k e y .
  • Page 385: Making Copies Using The Bypass Tray

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 59 of 231 MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY Overview In addition to plain paper, the bypass tray allows you to make copies on transparency film, envelopes, tab paper, and other special media. F o r d e t a i l e d i n f o r m a t i o n o n p a p e r t h a t c a n b e l o a d e d i n t o t h e b y p a s s t r a y , s e e "...
  • Page 386 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 60 of 231 Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. • AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER • DOCUMENT GLASS Tap the [Color Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying.
  • Page 387 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 61 of 231 SPECIFYING A TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER LOADED ON BYPASS TRAY Tap the [Paper Select] key, and tap the bypass tray key. • SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING Y o u c a n a l s o c a l l t h e [ P a p e r S e l e c t ] s c r e e n b y t a p p i n g t h e m a c h i n e i m a g e o n t h e b a s e s c r e e n .
  • Page 388 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 62 of 231 • [Size Set] key: Tap this key to manually specify the paper size that is not detected automatically. • [Direct Entry] key: Tap this key to enter a numeric value for the size of the loaded paper.
  • Page 389 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 63 of 231 SORT/GROUP SETTING Overview This section explains how to select the sorting method when outputting the scanned original. E n a b l e s t h e s o r t m o d e w h e n t h e o r i g i n a l i s p l a c e d i n t h e a u t o m a t i c d o c u m e n t f e e d e r , a n d e n a b l e s t h e g r o u p m o d e w h e n t h e o r i g i n a l i s p l a c e d o n t h e d o c u m e n t g l a s s .
  • Page 390 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 64 of 231 Select the sorting method. After the settings are completed, tap • S e l e c t i n g t h e O f f s e t c h e c k b o x o u t p u t s t h e s o r t e d p a p e r s h e e t s w h i l e s h i f t i n g t h e m s e t b y s e t t o e n a b l e t h e u s e r t o e a s i l y r e m o v e e a c h s e t f r o m t h e o u t p u t t r a y .
  • Page 391 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 65 of 231 STAPLE SORT SETTING Overview This function staples sorted copies and delivers them to the tray. B i n d i n g E d g e P r o c e s s i m a g e O F F D o e s n o t s t a p l e .
  • Page 392: Saddle Stitch

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 66 of 231 P a m p h l e t C o p y Y o u c a n v i e w s t a p l e p o s i t i o n s o n t h e " P R E V I E W S C R E E N "...
  • Page 393 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 67 of 231 k e y . [ C o n t i n u e ] : C o n t i n u e s s o r t i n g w i t h o u t s t a p l i n g . [ C a n c e l ] : C a n c e l s t h e s t a p l e s o r t s e t t i n g .
  • Page 394 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 68 of 231 [ C o n t i n u e ] : C o n t i n u e s s o r t i n g w i t h o u t s t a p l i n g . [ C a n c e l ] : C a n c e l s t h e s t a p l e s o r t s e t t i n g .
  • Page 395 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 69 of 231 PUNCH SETTING Overview This function punches copies and outputs them to the tray. You can select paper size of 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R to 11" x 17" (A4, A3) for punching. Y o u c a n v i e w p u n c h p o s i t i o n s o n t h e " P R E V I E W S C R E E N "...
  • Page 396 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 70 of 231 Tap the [On] key. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. • S e l e c t i n g t h e O f f s e t c h e c k b o x o u t p u t s t h e s o r t e d p a p e r s h e e t s w h i l e s h i f t i n g t h e m s e t b y s e t t o e n a b l e t h e u s e r t o e a s i l y r e m o v e e a c h s e t f r o m t h e o u t p u t t r a y .
  • Page 397 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 71 of 231 COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS AS A SINGLE PAGE (2IN1) Overview This function copies multiple original pages onto a single sheet of paper in a uniform layout. Select 2in1 to copy two original pages onto one sheet, 4in1 to copy four original pages onto one sheet, or 8in1 to copy eight original pages onto one sheet.
  • Page 398 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 72 of 231 W h e n i n s e r t i n g a c o v e r s h e e t , s e l e c t C o v e r S e t t i n g t o c o p y o n l y a f r o n t s h e e t t o o n e p a g e a n d c o l l e c t i v e l y c o p y t h e s e c o n d a n d s u b s e q u e n t p a g e s .
  • Page 399 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 73 of 231 T o c a n c e l t h e 2 i n 1 , 4 i n 1 s e t t i n g : T a p t h e [ O f f ] k e y . Check the preview image in the preview screen.
  • Page 400 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 74 of 231 02-034.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 401 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 75 of 231 COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND DOCUMENT (DUAL PAGE COPY) Overview This function copies the left and right half of an original successively. This function is useful when making copies of the facing pages of a book or other bound document.
  • Page 402 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 76 of 231 Place the original on the document glass, and tap the [Preview] key. Align the center of the original with the appropriate size mark (▼). • DOCUMENT GLASS Selects 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size paper. •...
  • Page 403 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 77 of 231 T o m a k e t w o o r m o r e s e t s o f c o p i e s : T a p t h e c o p i e s d i s p l a y k e y t o s p e c i f y t h e n u m b e r o f c o p i e s . 02-025.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 404 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 78 of 231 COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE (CARD SHOT) Overview This function copies the front and reverse sides of a card on one sheet, not on separate sheets. This function is convenient for making copies for identification purposes and helps save paper.
  • Page 405 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 79 of 231 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Card Shot] key. Tap the [On] key, and specify the original size as required. • T a p t h e a r e a s d i s p l a y i n g w i d t h a n d h e i g h t s i z e s r e s p e c t i v e l y , a n d e n t e r t h e s i z e s u s i n g t h e n u m e r i c k e y s .
  • Page 406 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 80 of 231 Place a card face down on the document glass, and tap the [Preview] key. • DOCUMENT GLASS Place a card face up on the document glass, and tap the [Additional Scan] key to scan the reverse side. C o p y s e t t i n g s c a n n o t b e c h a n g e d w h e n s c a n n i n g a d d i t i o n a l p a g e s .
  • Page 407 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 81 of 231 T o m a k e t w o o r m o r e s e t s o f c o p i e s : T a p t h e c o p i e s d i s p l a y k e y t o s p e c i f y t h e n u m b e r o f c o p i e s . 02-037.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 408 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 82 of 231 REPEATING THE SAME IMAGE ON ONE SHEET (REPEAT LAYOUT) Overview This function copies multiple same original images on one sheet. You can set any of the following three (3) types of repeat copy. R e p e a t m e t h o d D e s c r i p t i o n A u t o...
  • Page 409 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 83 of 231 • O r i g i n a l s i z e s u p t o 2 - 1 / 2 " x 4 " ( 7 0 m m x 1 0 0 m m ) •...
  • Page 410 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 84 of 231 Check the repeat faces which have been calculated automatically. Change the original size, paper size, or copy ratio by tapping the respective [Original], [Paper Select], or [Copy Ratio] key when necessary. • SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE •...
  • Page 411 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 85 of 231 Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. T o c a n c e l a l l s e t t i n g s : T a p t h e [ C A ] k e y .
  • Page 412 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 86 of 231 Tap the [Repeat Number] key to set a repeat count. After the settings are completed, tap The automatic calculation result is shown as the copy ratio. I f t h e c a l c u l a t e d c o p y r a t i o e x c e e d s t h e r a n g e f r o m 2 5 % t o 4 0 0 % , a n e r r o r o c c u r s .
  • Page 413 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 87 of 231 Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. T o c a n c e l a l l s e t t i n g s : T a p t h e [ C A ] k e y .
  • Page 414 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 88 of 231 Tap the [Paper Select] key and select a paper size. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. W h e n y o u t a p t h e [ O r i g i n a l s i z e s u p t o 3 " x 5 " ( 1 3 0 m m x 9 0 m m ) ] k e y o n t h e [ O r i g i n a l ] s c r e e n , y o u c a n s e l e c t t h e A 4 p a p e r s i z e o n l y .
  • Page 415 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 89 of 231 Tap the [Color Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. T o m a k e t w o o r m o r e c o p i e s , t a p t h e c o p i e s d i s p l a y k e y t o s e t a n u m b e r o f c o p i e s .
  • Page 416 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 90 of 231 MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT (PAMPHLET COPY) Overview Copies made by "Pamphlet Copy" can be folded at the center to create a booklet. This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.
  • Page 417 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 91 of 231 • T o m a k e p a m p h l e t c o p i e s o f a b o o k o r o t h e r b o u n d o r i g i n a l , u s e t h e b o o k c o p y f u n c t i o n .
  • Page 418 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 92 of 231 F r o m t h e " S e t t i n g m o d e " , s e l e c t [ S y s t e m S e t t i n g s ] → [ C o p y S e t t i n g s ] →...
  • Page 419 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 93 of 231 When inserting a cover, tap the [Cover Setting] key, and tap the [On] key. T o c h a n g e t h e c o v e r i n p u t t r a y : T a p t h e [ P a p e r T r a y ] k e y t o d i s p l a y t h e t r a y s e l e c t i o n s c r e e n .
  • Page 420 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 94 of 231 When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. T o m a k e t w o o r m o r e s e t s o f c o p i e s : T a p t h e c o p i e s d i s p l a y k e y t o s p e c i f y t h e n u m b e r o f c o p i e s .
  • Page 421 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 95 of 231 COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ON EACH PAMPHLET COPY PAGE (PAMPHLET COPY 2IN1/4IN1) Overview This function copies two or four original pages equally on one page of pamphlet copy paper. This function is convenient for arranging minimum number of copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet format.
  • Page 422 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 96 of 231 Operation Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. • AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER • DOCUMENT GLASS I f t h e o r i g i n a l s a r e 2 - s i d e d , p l a c e t h e m i n t h e d o c u m e n t f e e d e r t r a y .
  • Page 423 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 97 of 231 When inserting a cover, tap the [Cover Setting] key, and tap the [On] key. • T o c h a n g e t h e c o v e r i n p u t t r a y : T a p t h e [ P a p e r T r a y ] k e y t o d i s p l a y t h e t r a y s e l e c t i o n s c r e e n .
  • Page 424 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 98 of 231 Select the border. A line can be inserted between pages arranged on a sheet. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results.
  • Page 425 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 99 of 231 T a p t h e c o p i e s d i s p l a y k e y t o s p e c i f y t h e n u m b e r o f c o p i e s . 02-027.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 426 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 100 of 231 COPYING A PAMPHLET (BOOK COPY) Overview This function makes a copy of the two facing pages of an open book or other bound document. Copies made with this function can be folded at the center to create a booklet.
  • Page 427 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 101 of 231 • T h i s f u n c t i o n c a n b e c o m b i n e d w i t h s a d d l e s t i t c h o r f o l d i f a s a d d l e f i n i s h e r i s i n s t a l l e d .
  • Page 428 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 102 of 231 When inserting a cover, tap the [Cover Setting] key, and tap the [On] key. To make a copy on the inserted cover sheet, check the [Make Copy on Cover (Duplex)] box so that appears.
  • Page 429 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 103 of 231 Place the next opened original pages, and tap the [Additional Scan] key. Repeat this step until all original pages have been scanned. Scan the remaining original pages in the following order: Inside of the front cover and the 1st page (facing pages) Inside of the 2nd and 3rd pages (facing pages) Inside of the last page and back cover (facing pages) C o p y s e t t i n g s c a n n o t b e c h a n g e d w h e n s c a n n i n g a d d i t i o n a l p a g e s .
  • Page 430 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 104 of 231 SPLITTING A PAMPHLET ORIGINAL BY PAGE (BOOK DIVIDE) Overview This function splits a saddle-stitch original such as a catalogue or a pamphlet page by page, and copies in sequence. • B o o k D i v i d e m u s t b e s p e c i f i e d b e f o r e s c a n n i n g t h e o r i g i n a l . •...
  • Page 431 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 105 of 231 C h e c k t h e p r e v i e w i m a g e d i s p l a y e d i n t h e s c r e e n , a n d m a k e s u r e t h a t t h e b i n d i n g e d g e i s c o r r e c t .
  • Page 432 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 106 of 231 T o m a k e t w o o r m o r e s e t s o f c o p i e s : T a p t h e c o p i e s d i s p l a y k e y t o s p e c i f y t h e n u m b e r o f c o p i e s . 02-066.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 433 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 107 of 231 SKIPPING BLANK PAGES IN AN ORIGINAL (BLANK PAGE SKIP) Overview If the scanned original contains blank pages, this function skips them to copy only non-blank pages. The machine detects blank pages, enabling you to skip useless copies without checking an original.
  • Page 434 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 108 of 231 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. • AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER • DOCUMENT GLASS Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Blank Page Skip] key. Tap the [Skip Blank Page] or [Skip Blank and Back Shadow] key.
  • Page 435 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 109 of 231 T o m a k e t w o o r m o r e s e t s o f c o p i e s : T a p t h e c o p i e s d i s p l a y k e y t o s p e c i f y t h e n u m b e r o f c o p i e s . Check the confirmation message, and tap the [Execute] key to start copying.
  • Page 436 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 110 of 231 REDUCING THE IMAGE QUALITY FOR TONER SAVING This function minimizes toner consumption when making copies such as in-house resources, which are not affected even if the image quality is reduced slightly. The toner saving level can be selected from up to three levels.
  • Page 437 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 111 of 231 WHITENING FAINT COLORS IN THE IMAGE (SUPPRESS BACKGROUND) Overview Suppresses light background areas of originals. S u p p r e s s B a c k g r o u n d m u s t b e s p e c i f i e d b e f o r e s c a n n i n g t h e o r i g i n a l . Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Suppress Background] key.
  • Page 438 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 112 of 231 After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. •...
  • Page 439 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 113 of 231 T o m a k e t w o o r m o r e s e t s o f c o p i e s : T a p t h e c o p i e s d i s p l a y k e y t o s p e c i f y t h e n u m b e r o f c o p i e s . 02-053.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 440 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 114 of 231 MAKING A PROOF COPY (PROOF COPY) Overview This function makes a proof copy before printing the specified number of copies. Check the preview image with a proof copy. If necessary, change the setting. Using this function stores the scanned original in the machine, saving you the trouble of re-scanning the original in the changed setting.
  • Page 441 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 115 of 231 p r i n t e d p r e f e r e n t i a l l y . T h e i n t e r r u p t e d j o b w i l l r e s u m e a f t e r p r o o f c o p y i n g h a s b e e n c o m p l e t e d .
  • Page 442 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 116 of 231 Check whether or not settings produce the required results. T o c a n c e l a l l s e t t i n g s : T a p t h e [ C A ] k e y . Set the number of copies (number of sets) using the numeric keys.
  • Page 443 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 117 of 231 T o c a n c e l a l l s e t t i n g s : T a p t h e [ C A ] k e y . Tap the [Color Start] or [B/W Start] key.
  • Page 444 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 118 of 231 CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS (ORIGINAL COUNT) Overview This function counts the number of scanned original sheets, and displays the result before making a copy. By allowing you to check the number of original sheets that were scanned, this helps reduce the occurrence of copy mistakes.
  • Page 445 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 119 of 231 • AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Check the number of original sheets. The number that is displayed is the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages. For example, when 2-sided copying is performed using one original, the number "1"...
  • Page 446 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 120 of 231 USING TWO MACHINES TO REDUCE THE COPY TIME (TANDEM COPY) Overview This function shares a copy job half-and-half between two machines connected to the network, enabling the reduction of the copy time. Master machine and slave machine The master machine performs only scanning, and a slave machine registered in the master machine performs only printing without...
  • Page 447 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 121 of 231 • T o c o n f i g u r e t h e t a n d e m c o n n e c t i o n s e t t i n g , r e g i s t e r I P a d d r e s s i n f o r m a t i o n o f t h e s l a v e m a c h i n e i n t h e m a s t e r m a c h i n e .
  • Page 448 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 122 of 231 T o u s e T a n d e m C o p y : I n " S e t t i n g m o d e " , s e l e c t [ S y s t e m S e t t i n g s ] → [ D e v i c e C o n t r o l ] → [ T a n d e m C o n n e c t i o n S e t t i n g ] .
  • Page 449 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 123 of 231 I f a n i n c o r r e c t n u m b e r o f c o p i e s i s s e t T a p t h e [ C ] k e y a n d t h e n e n t e r t h e c o r r e c t n u m b e r .
  • Page 450 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 124 of 231 PADDING UNAUTHORIZED COPY PREVENTION DATA (PATTERN PRINT) Overview Characters to prevent unauthorized copying such as pre-set or customized text are placed as invisible characters in a background pattern. When an output sheet with a pattern print is copied, the hidden characters will appear.
  • Page 451 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 125 of 231 T h i s f u n c t i o n c a n n o t b e c o m b i n e d w i t h R e p e a t L a y o u t o r M u l t i - P a g e E n l a r g e m e n t .
  • Page 452 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 126 of 231 T h e b l a c k b a c k g r o u n d p a t t e r n i s p r i n t e d i n t h e f o l l o w i n g c a s e s e v e n w h e n y o u s e t t h e [ P r i n t C o l o r ] t o "...
  • Page 453 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 127 of 231 T a p p i n g t h e [ F u n c t i o n R e v . ] k e y d i s p l a y s t h e s e t t i n g s o f t h e [ P r i n t C o n t e n t s S e t t i n g ] t a b .
  • Page 454 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 128 of 231 T o m a k e t w o o r m o r e s e t s o f c o p i e s : T a p t h e c o p i e s d i s p l a y k e y t o s p e c i f y t h e n u m b e r o f c o p i e s . 02-062.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 455 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 129 of 231 FORCIBLY PRINTING TRACEABLE INFORMATION (TRACKING INFORMATION PRINT) This function forcibly prints the pre-specified traceable information to prevent an unauthorized copy. T o c o n f i g u r e p r i n t s e t t i n g s : I n "...
  • Page 456: Margin Shift

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 130 of 231 ADDING MARGINS (MARGIN SHIFT) Overview This function shifts the copy image right, left or down to adjust the margin. This is convenient when you wish to bind the copies with a string or in a binder.
  • Page 457 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 131 of 231 R o t a t i o n c o p y c a n n o t b e u s e d i n c o m b i n a t i o n w i t h t h e m a r g i n s h i f t f u n c t i o n .
  • Page 458 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 132 of 231 • T o q u i c k l y s e t t h e a r e a , f i r s t s p e c i f y a v a l u e c l o s e t o t h e d e s i r e d v a l u e b y t h e n u m e r i c k e y s , t h e n a d j u s t i t w i t h •...
  • Page 459 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 133 of 231 When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. T o m a k e t w o o r m o r e s e t s o f c o p i e s : T a p t h e c o p i e s d i s p l a y k e y t o s p e c i f y t h e n u m b e r o f c o p i e s .
  • Page 460 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 134 of 231 ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS FOR COPYING (ERASE) Overview The erase function is used to erase shadows around the edges of copies that occur when copying thick originals or books. I f a r a t i o s e t t i n g i s u s e d i n c o m b i n a t i o n w i t h a n e r a s e s e t t i n g , t h e e r a s e w i d t h w i l l c h a n g e a c c o r d i n g t o t h e s e l e c t e d r a t i o .
  • Page 461 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 135 of 231 Erase modes I f a r a t i o s e t t i n g i s u s e d i n c o m b i n a t i o n w i t h a n e r a s e s e t t i n g , t h e e r a s e w i d t h w i l l c h a n g e a c c o r d i n g t o t h e s e l e c t e d r a t i o .
  • Page 462 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 136 of 231 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Erase] key. Tap the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase, and specify the erase position. Check that he tapped checkbox is set to If the [Specify Frame] key is tapped, the [Up], [Down], [Left], and [Right] checkboxes are set to If the [Specify Frame+Center] key is tapped, all the checkboxes...
  • Page 463 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 137 of 231 • T a p t h e n u m e r i c v a l u e d i s p l a y i n d i c a t i n g t h e m a r g i n s h i f t a r e a o n t h e f r o n t s i d e o r r e v e r s e s i d e , a n d e n t e r t h e a r e a u s i n g t h e n u m e r i c k e y s .
  • Page 464 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 138 of 231 02-024.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 465 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 139 of 231 COPYING 11" x 17" (A3) ORIGINALS WITH NO EDGE CUT- (12" X 18" (A3) FULL BLEED COPY) Overview This feature lets you copy an entire 11" x 17" (A3) size original at full size with no image cut-off at the edges.
  • Page 466 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 140 of 231 Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. • DOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. T o c a n c e l a l l s e t t i n g s : T a p t h e [ C A ] k e y .
  • Page 467 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 141 of 231 COPYING IN THE CENTER OF THE PAPER (CENTERING) Overview This function centers the copied image on the paper. This lets you place the image in the center of the paper when the original size is smaller than the paper size or when the image is reduced.
  • Page 468 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 142 of 231 Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. • AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER • DOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen.
  • Page 469 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 143 of 231 SPECIFYING A PAPER POSITION (POSITION IMAGE) Overview This function moves the scanned original to a specified position to make a copy. You can make a copy in any desired position as you can fine adjust the position.
  • Page 470 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 144 of 231 • T o q u i c k l y s e t t h e a r e a , f i r s t s p e c i f y a v a l u e c l o s e t o t h e d e s i r e d v a l u e b y t h e n u m e r i c k e y s , t h e n a d j u s t i t w i t h •...
  • Page 471 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 145 of 231 T o c a n c e l a l l s e t t i n g s : T a p t h e [ C A ] k e y . Tap the [Color Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying.
  • Page 472 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 146 of 231 COLLECTIVELY SCANNING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS (JOB BUILD) Overview This function divides the originals into sets and feeds each set through the automatic document feeder one set at a time when copying a very large number of originals.
  • Page 473 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 147 of 231 • T h e J o b B u i l d m o d e m u s t b e s p e c i f i e d b e f o r e s c a n n i n g t h e o r i g i n a l .
  • Page 474 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 148 of 231 Operation • Copying in job build mode • Changing the copy settings for each set of originals Copying in job build mode Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Job Build] key. A checkmark appears on the icon.
  • Page 475 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 149 of 231 S e t a c o l o r m o d e a n d o t h e r s . W h e n c h a n g i n g c o p y s e t t i n g s , t a p t h e [ C h a n g e t h e s e t t i n g s o f t h e o r i g i n a l t o b e s c a n n e d n e x t ] k e y .
  • Page 476 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 150 of 231 Changing the copy settings for each set of originals As necessary, change copy settings for each set of originals. Perform the steps below before scanning the next original in step 4 above. Tap [Change the settings of the original to be scanned next] on the action panel, and set the checkbox to Change copy settings.
  • Page 477 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 151 of 231 SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES (MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL) Overview This feature copies originals in different sizes at the same time even when 8-1/2" x 14" (B4) size originals are mixed with 11" x 17" (A3) size originals.
  • Page 478 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 152 of 231 There are two settings for mixed size originals. S a m e W i d t h D i f f e r e n t W i d t h U s e t h i s s e t t i n g f o r o r i g i n a l s t h a t U s e t h i s s e t t i n g w h e n t h e o r i g i n a l s a r e d i f a r e d i f f e r e n t s i z e s b u t h a v e s i d e f e r e n t s i z e s a n d d o n o t h a v e s i d e s t h a t a r...
  • Page 479 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 153 of 231 M i x e d S i z e O r i g i n a l m u s t b e s p e c i f i e d b e f o r e s c a n n i n g t h e o r i g i n a l . •...
  • Page 480 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 154 of 231 Place the original face up on the document glass, and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original as shown on the Mixed Size Original screen. Tap the [Color Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies.
  • Page 481 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 155 of 231 T a p t h e c o p i e s d i s p l a y k e y t o s p e c i f y t h e n u m b e r o f c o p i e s . 02-059.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 482: Scan Mode

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 156 of 231 SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS (SLOW SCAN MODE) Overview When you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder, you can use this function, which helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding. S l o w S c a n M o d e m u s t b e s p e c i f i e d b e f o r e s c a n n i n g t h e o r i g i n a l . T h e "...
  • Page 483 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 157 of 231 T o c a n c e l s l o w s c a n m o d e : T a p t h e [ S l o w S c a n M o d e ] k e y t o c l e a r t h e c h e c k m a r k . Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, and tap the [Preview] key.
  • Page 484 After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. When using the MX-4140N/MX-5140N, the resolution for the automatic document feeder cannot be changed (It is fixed to 600 x 600 dpi.). file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 485 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 159 of 231 Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. • AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER • DOCUMENT GLASS Tap the [B/W Start] key to start copying.
  • Page 486 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 160 of 231 PRINTING DATES, PAGE NUMBERS, AND WATERMARKS (STAMP) Overview This function prints information such as the date or stamp, which is not shown on the original, on copies. You can print the following five types of information.
  • Page 487 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 161 of 231 f o l l o w i n g o r d e r : w a t e r m a r k , r i g h t s i d e , l e f t s i d e , c e n t e r . C o n t e n t t h a t i s h i d d e n d u e t o o v e r l a p p i n g w i l l n o t b e p r i n t e d .
  • Page 488 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 162 of 231 Operation Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. • AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER • DOCUMENT GLASS Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Stamp] key.
  • Page 489 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 163 of 231 • T a p p i n g t h e [ D e t a i l ] k e y a l l o w s y o u t o c o n f i g u r e s e t t i n g f o r e a c h t a b s u c h a s a p r i n t c o l o r .
  • Page 490 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 164 of 231 • I f c o l o r p r i n t i n g i s s p e c i f i e d f o r t h e o r i g i n a l i n b l a c k a n d w h i t e , i t i s c o u n t e d a s a f u l l c o l o r c o p y .
  • Page 491 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 165 of 231 02-038.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 492 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 166 of 231 ADDING A REGISTERED IMAGE TO AN ORIGINAL (CUSTOM IMAGE) Overview This function adds an image registered in the machine to an original to make a copy. There are following two types of custom images. •...
  • Page 493 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 167 of 231 • A c u s t o m s t a m p i m a g e i s c o p i e d b y s h e e t , n o t b y o r i g i n a l . I f 2 i n 1 , 4 i n 1 i s e n a b l e d , u s e r s t a m p s a r e c o p i e d f o r e a c h s e t o f p a g e s .
  • Page 494 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 168 of 231 T r a n s p a r e n c M a k e s a s t a m p c o p y a s n o r m a l . y I n s e r t s 2 i n 1 M a k e s a s t a m p c o p y b y s h e e t .
  • Page 495 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 169 of 231 P o s i t i o n I m a P r i n t s a n i m a g e a t t h e o r i g i n a l p o s i t i o n r e g a r d l e s s o f t h e P o s i t i o n I m a g e s e t t i n g .
  • Page 496 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 170 of 231 For custom stamp P r i n t P a g e S p e c i f y a p a g e ( s ) f o r s t a m p c o p y . F i r s t P a g e o r A l l P a g e s P r i n t P o s i t i o n S p e c i f y a p o s i t i o n f o r s t a m p c o p y .
  • Page 497 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 171 of 231 2 - S i d e d O r i S p e c i f y t h e b i n d i n g e d g e f o r 2 - s i d e d o r i g i n a l . B o o k g i n a l T y p e o r T a b l e t A n g l e...
  • Page 498 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 172 of 231 INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS) Overview This function inserts a different type of paper into the pages corresponding to the front and back covers of a copy job. It is helpful when you want to change cover paper to make resources look better.
  • Page 499 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 173 of 231 • 1-sided copying of 1-sided originals • 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals • 1-sided copying of 2-sided originals • 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals 1-sided copying of 1-sided originals S e t t i n g c o n d i t i o n s f o r e a c h c o v e R e s u l t i n g c o p i e s F r o n t c o v e r B a c k c o v e r...
  • Page 500 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 174 of 231 N o t c o p i e d 1 - s i d e d c o p y I n s e r t s a f r o n t c o v e r a t t h e b e g i n n i n g o f c o p i e s , a n d m a k e s a 1 - s i d e d c o p y o n t h e s i x t h o r i g i n a l p a g e f o r b a c k c o v e r .
  • Page 501 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 175 of 231 2 - S I D E D C O P Y 1 - s i d e d c o p y M a k e s a 2 - s i d e d c o p y o n t h e f i r s t a n d s e c o n d o r i g i n a l p a g e s f o r f r o n t c o v e r , a n d a l s o m a k e s a 1 - s i d e d c o p y o n t h e s i x t h o r i g i n a l p a g e f o r b a c k c o v e r .
  • Page 502 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 176 of 231 2 - S I D E D C O P Y N o t c o p i e d M a k e s a 2 - s i d e d c o p y o n t h e f i r s t a n d s e c o n d o r i g i n a l p a g e s f o r f r o n t c o v e r , a n d i n s e r t s a b a c k c o v e r a t t h e e n d o f c o p i e s .
  • Page 503 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 177 of 231 2 - S I D E D C O P Y 1 - s i d e d c o p y M a k e s a 2 - s i d e d c o p y o n t h e f i r s t a n d s e c o n d o r i g i n a l p a g e s f o r f r o n t c o v e r , a n d a l s o m a k e s a 1 - s i d e d c o p y o n t h e s i x t h o r i g i n a l p a g e f o r b a c k c o v e r .
  • Page 504 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 178 of 231 M a k e s a 1 - s i d e d c o p y o n t h e f i r s t o r i g i n a l p a g e f o r f r o n t c o v e r , a n d i n s e r t s a b a c k c o v e r a t t h e e n d o f c o p i e s .
  • Page 505 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 179 of 231 a l p a g e f o r f r o n t c o v e r , a n d a l s o m a k e s a 1 - s i d e d c o p y o n t h e s i x t h o r i g i n a l p a g e f o r b a c k c o v e r .
  • Page 506 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 180 of 231 N o t c o p i e d N o t c o p i e d I n s e r t s c o v e r s h e e t s a t t h e b e g i n n i n g a n d e n d o f c o p i e s .
  • Page 507 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 181 of 231 1 - s i d e d c o p y 1 - s i d e d c o p y M a k e s a 1 - s i d e d c o p y o n t h e f i r s t o r i g i n a l p a g e f o r f r o n t c o v e r , a n d a l s o m a k e s a 1 - s i d e d c o p y o n t h e s i x t h o r i g i n a l p a g e f o r b a c k c o v e r .
  • Page 508 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 182 of 231 • W h e n s e l e c t i n g t h e c o v e r s / i n s e r t s f u n c t i o n , p l a c e t h e o r i g i n a l s i n t h e d o c u m e n t f e e d e r t r a y , s e l e c t 1 - s i d e d o r 2 - s i d e d c o p y i n g , a n d s e l e c t t h e n u m b e r o f c o p i e s a n d a n y o t h e r d e s i r e d c o p y s e t t i n g s .
  • Page 509 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 183 of 231 Tap the [Change] key, and configure copy setting of a front cover sheet. When only inserting a cover, tap the [Do not copy] key. T o c h a n g e t h e c o v e r i n p u t t r a y : T a p t h e [ P a p e r T r a y S e t t i n g s ] k e y t o d i s p l a y t h e i n p u t t r a y s e t t i n g s c r e e n .
  • Page 510 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 184 of 231 After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. • T o c a n c e l c o v e r s h e e t i n s e r t i o n : T a p t h e [ O f f ] k e y .
  • Page 511 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 185 of 231 INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS) Overview This function inserts a sheet of paper into a specific page as an insertion sheet. There are two types of insertion sheets. Insertion positions can be specified.
  • Page 512 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 186 of 231 • 2-sided original copying 1-sided original copying R e s u l t i n g c o p i e s I n s e r t i o n s h e I n s e r t a n i n s e r t i o n s h e e t s e t t i n g c o I n s e r t a n i n s e r t i o n s h e e t i n 1...
  • Page 513 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 187 of 231 R e s u l t i n g c o p i e s I n s e r t i o n s h e I n s e r t a n i n s e r t i o n s h e e t s e t t i n g c o I n s e r t a n i n s e r t i o n s h e e t i n 1 e t i n 2 - s i d e d c o p y m o d...
  • Page 514 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 188 of 231 c o p y i n g , a n d s e l e c t t h e n u m b e r o f c o p i e s a n d a n y o t h e r d e s i r e d c o p y s e t t i n g s .
  • Page 515 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 189 of 231 Tap the insert page display key. The Insertion Type B settings are the same as the Insertion Type A settings. Enter the number of the page you want to insert a sheet into using numeric keys, and then tap the [Enter] key.
  • Page 516 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 190 of 231 When only inserting insertion sheet A, tap the [Make No Copy] key. When making a copy on insertion sheet A, tap the [Simplex] or [2-Sided Copy] key. T o c h a n g e a n i n s e r t i o n s h e e t : T a p t h e [ P a p e r T r a y ] k e y , a n d s e l e c t t h e t r a y w i t h i n s e r t i o n s h e e t s l o a d e d .
  • Page 517 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 191 of 231 Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. T o c a n c e l a l l s e t t i n g s : T a p t h e [ C A ] k e y .
  • Page 518: Page Layout

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 192 of 231 CHECKING, EDITING, AND DELETING THE PAGE LAYOUT OF COVERS AND INSERTION SHEETS (PAGE LAYOUT) T h e e d i t i n g c o n t e n t s a r e d i f f e r e n t b e t w e e n t h e r e g i s t e r e d c o v e r s a n d i n s e r t i o n s h e e t s a s s h o w n b e l o w .
  • Page 519 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 193 of 231 Check the page layout. To exit this job after checking the page layout, tap the key. To edit or delete, tap the required key. When deleting, tap the [Delete] key. When editing, tap the [Modify] key. Change cover or insertion sheet settings.
  • Page 520 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 194 of 231 INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN BETWEEN TRANSPARENCY FILMS (TRANSPARENCY INSERTS) Overview When copying on transparency film, the sheets may stick together due to static electricity. The transparency inserts function can be used to automatically insert a sheet of paper between each sheet of transparency film, making the sheets easy to handle.
  • Page 521 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 195 of 231 Operation Place the transparency film face down in the bypass tray, and load transparency film sheets. After loading the transparency film, configure the bypass tray settings. • MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY Place the original and tap the [Preview] key.
  • Page 522 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 196 of 231 T a p t h e [ O f f ] k e y . Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. T o c a n c e l a l l s e t t i n g s : T a p t h e [ C A ] k e y .
  • Page 523 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 197 of 231 COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER (TAB COPY) Overview Load a tab sheet in the bypass tray, and make a copy on a tab. Prepare appropriate originals for tab captions. Relation between the originals and the tab paper Tab copying with a left binding O r i g i n a l s P l a c i n g t h e o r i g i n a l s...
  • Page 524: Tab Copying With A Right Binding

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 198 of 231 Tab copying with a right binding O r i g i n a l s P l a c i n g t h e o r i g i n a l s L o a d i n g t a b p a p e r T a b C o p y m u s t b e s p e c i f i e d b e f o r e s c a n n i n g t h e o r i g i n a l .
  • Page 525 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 199 of 231 • T a p t h e n u m e r i c v a l u e d i s p l a y i n d i c a t i n g t h e i m a g e s h i f t w i d t h , a n d e n t e r a s h i f t w i d t h u s i n g n u m e r i c k e y s .
  • Page 526 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 200 of 231 T h e w i d t h o f t h e t a b p a p e r c a n b e a s w i d e a s 8 - 1 / 2 " x 1 1 " p a p e r ( 8 - 1 / 2 "...
  • Page 527 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 201 of 231 T o m a k e t w o o r m o r e s e t s o f c o p i e s : T a p t h e c o p i e s d i s p l a y k e y t o s p e c i f y t h e n u m b e r o f c o p i e s . 02-036.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 528 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 202 of 231 MAKING A POSTER-SIZED COPY (MULTI-PAGE ENLARGEMENT) Overview This function separately copies an enlarged original image on multiple sheets. • M u l t i - P a g e E n l a r g e m e n t m u s t b e s p e c i f i e d b e f o r e s c a n n i n g t h e o r i g i n a l .
  • Page 529 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 203 of 231 Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Multi-Page Enlargement] key. Select the [AB] or [Inch] tab to meet the original size for multi-page enlargement, and tap the key that meets the original size.
  • Page 530 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 204 of 231 T a p t h e [ C l e a r ] k e y . A l t h o u g h t h e m u l t i - p a g e e n l a r g e m e n t s e t t i n g i s c a n c e l e d , t h e r a t i o s e l e c t e d a u t o m a t i c a l l y i s k e p t v a l i d .
  • Page 531: Mirror Image

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 205 of 231 COPYING WITH MIRROR IMAGE (MIRROR IMAGE) Overview This function makes copies by inverting the original into a mirror image. S p e c i f y t h e M i r r o r I m a g e b e f o r e s c a n n i n g a n o r i g i n a l . Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Mirror Image] key.
  • Page 532 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 206 of 231 Check the preview image in the preview screen. Check whether or not settings produce the required results. Tap the [Color Start] or [B/W Start] key to start copying. When making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies.
  • Page 533 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 207 of 231 REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A COPY (B/W REVERSE) Overview This function reverses black and white in a copy to create a negative image. This function can only be used for black and white copying. Originals with large black areas (which use a large amount of toner) can be copied using Black/White Reverse to reduce toner consumption.
  • Page 534 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 208 of 231 T o c a n c e l B / W r e v e r s e : T a p t h e [ B / W R e v e r s e ] k e y t o u n c h e c k i t . Place the original and tap the [Preview] key.
  • Page 535 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 209 of 231 ADJUSTING RED/GREEN/BLUE IN COPIES (RGB) Overview This function heightens or lightens any one of the three color components R (red), G (green), and B (blue). R G B m u s t b e s p e c i f i e d b e f o r e s c a n n i n g t h e o r i g i n a l . Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [RGB] key.
  • Page 536 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 210 of 231 T o c a n c e l t h e R G B a d j u s t s e t t i n g : T a p t h e [ O f f ] k e y . Place the original and tap the [Preview] key.
  • Page 537 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 211 of 231 T o m a k e t w o o r m o r e s e t s o f c o p i e s : T a p t h e c o p i e s d i s p l a y k e y t o s p e c i f y t h e n u m b e r o f c o p i e s . 02-051.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 538 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 212 of 231 ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE (SHARPNESS) Overview This function adjusts the sharpness to make a sharper or softer image. S h a r p n e s s m u s t b e s p e c i f i e d b e f o r e s c a n n i n g t h e o r i g i n a l . Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Sharpness] key.
  • Page 539 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 213 of 231 Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. • AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER • DOCUMENT GLASS T o c a n c e l a l l s e t t i n g s : T a p t h e [ C A ] k e y .
  • Page 540 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 214 of 231 ADJUSTING THE COLOR (COLOR BALANCE) Overview This function adjusts the color, tone, and density. This function divides each of colors, yellow, magenta, cyan, and black, into eight gradations from light to dark, and adjusts the average density of each gradation.
  • Page 541 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 215 of 231 Tap the key or slide the slider to adjust the color balance. To individually adjust eight sliders, set the [Set in a Batch] checkbox to , and slide the control of each slider. When using the key to individually adjust eight sliders, tap the required slider and tap the...
  • Page 542 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 216 of 231 S e t t i n g s ] i n " S e t t i n g m o d e " → [ C o p y S e t t i n g s ] → [ C o l o r A d j u s t ] →...
  • Page 543 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 217 of 231 ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OF A COPY (BRIGHTNESS) Overview This function adjusts the brightness of a color copy image. B r i g h t n e s s m u s t b e s p e c i f i e d b e f o r e s c a n n i n g t h e o r i g i n a l . Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Brightness] key.
  • Page 544 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 218 of 231 Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. • AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER • DOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen.
  • Page 545 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 219 of 231 T o m a k e t w o o r m o r e s e t s o f c o p i e s : T a p t h e c o p i e s d i s p l a y k e y t o s p e c i f y t h e n u m b e r o f c o p i e s . 02-055.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 546 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 220 of 231 ADJUSTING THE INTENSITY OF A COPY (INTENSITY) Overview This function adjusts the intensity (saturation) of a color copy image. I n t e n s i t y m u s t b e s p e c i f i e d b e f o r e s c a n n i n g t h e o r i g i n a l . This function cannot be combined with [Copy of Copy] or [Color Tone Enhancement] in Exposure.
  • Page 547 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 221 of 231 Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. • AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER • DOCUMENT GLASS Check the preview image in the preview screen.
  • Page 548 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 222 of 231 T o m a k e t w o o r m o r e s e t s o f c o p i e s : T a p t h e c o p i e s d i s p l a y k e y t o s p e c i f y t h e n u m b e r o f c o p i e s . 02-056.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 549: Copy Jobs

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 223 of 231 COPY JOBS When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To check the status of a copy job, tap the [Print] tab. When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing, see the following items: •...
  • Page 550: Storing A Program

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 224 of 231 STORING A PROGRAM Overview This function collectively stores copy settings as one program. The stored program can be retrieved using an easy operation. For information about how to retrieve a program, see "RETRIEVING PROGRAM".
  • Page 551 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 225 of 231 S e t s m a r g i n s . S e t s p u n c h h o l e s e t t i n g s . T a p t h e [ C o l o r S t a r t ] k e y o r t h e [ B / W S t a r t ] k e y .
  • Page 552 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 226 of 231 Tap a key not used yet for program registration. A key with a program stored is displayed in color. Tap a key with no program stored. I f a p r o g r a m i s n o t n a m e d , a s e r i a l n u m b e r i s a u t o m a t i c a l l y a s s i g n e d i n s t e a d o f a p r o g r a m n a m e .
  • Page 553 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 227 of 231 • I f u s e r a u t h e n t i c a t i o n i s e n a b l e d , a s h o r t c u t o f t h e p r o g r a m i s r e g i s t e r e d i n t h e u s e r ' s h o m e p a g e o r b o o k m a r k .
  • Page 554 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 228 of 231 RETRIEVING A PROGRAM Tap [Call Program] key on the action panel. Tap the key of the program you want to retrieve. • S e l e c t a p r o g r a m k e y , a n d t a p t h e [ A d d t o B o o k m a r k ] o r [ R e g i s t e r i n H o m e ] k e y o n t h e a c t i o n p a n e l .
  • Page 555: Deleting A Program

    USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 229 of 231 DELETING AND RENAMING A PROGRAM Overview This section explains how to delete copy settings in a program and rename a program. • A p r o g r a m t h a t i s a l r e a d y s t o r e d c a n n o t b e d e l e t e d . •...
  • Page 556 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 230 of 231 Tap the key of the program you want to delete, and tap the [Delete] key. Renaming a program Tap [Call Program] key on the action panel. Tap the [Change Name] key on the action panel. file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 557 USER'S MANUAL - COPY Page 231 of 231 Tap the key of the required program, and rename the program. Then tap the [OK] key. After the settings are completed, tap 02-074.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 558 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 1 of 160 Digital full-color multifunction machine MX-4140N/MX- 4141N/MX-5140N/MX-5141N PRINTING "PRINTER" file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 559: Printer Function Of The Machine

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 2 of 160 PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE The machine is equipped with a full color printing function as standard. To enable printing from your computer, a printer driver must be installed. See the table below to determine which printer driver to use in your environment.
  • Page 560 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 3 of 160 P r i n t e r d r i v e r t y p e ® T h i s p r i n t e r d r i v e r s u p p o r t s t h e P o s t S c r i p t p a g e d e s c r i p t i o n l a n g u a g e d e v e l o p e d b y A d o b e S y s t e m s I n c o r p o r a t e d a n d u s e s a P P D f i l e .
  • Page 561 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 4 of 160 PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT Overview • T h e m e n u u s e d t o e x e c u t e p r i n t i n g m a y v a r y d e p e n d i n g o n t h e a p p l i c a t i o n .
  • Page 562 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 5 of 160 Select the printer driver for the machine and click the [Preferences] button. If the printer drivers appear as a list, select the name of the printer driver to be used from the list. C l i c k a t a b o n t h e "...
  • Page 563 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 6 of 160 • Make sure the paper size is the same as the paper size set in the application. • You can register up to seven user-defined sizes in the pull- down menu. To store a paper size, select [Custom Paper] or one of [User 1] to [User 7] from the pull-down menu and click the [Custom] button.
  • Page 564 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 7 of 160 PRINTING IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT Overview • T h e m e n u u s e d t o e x e c u t e p r i n t i n g m a y v a r y d e p e n d i n g o n t h e a p p l i c a t i o n .
  • Page 565 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 8 of 160 Select [Print] from the [File] menu. Make sure that the correct printer is selected. file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 566 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 9 of 160 Select the print settings and click the [Print] button. • I n M a c O S X 1 0 . 4 , c l i c k n e x t t o [ C o p i e s & P a g e s ] a n d s e l e c t t h e s e t t i n g s t h a t y o u w i s h t o c o n f i g u r e f r o m t h e p u l l - d o w n m e n u .
  • Page 567 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 10 of 160 PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT (WHEN USER AUTHENTICATION IS USED) Overview The user information (such as login name and password) that must be entered varies depending on the authentication method being used, so check with the administrator of the machine before printing. •...
  • Page 568 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 11 of 160 T o p r o h i b i t p r i n t i n g b y u s e r s w h o s e u s e r i n f o r m a t i o n i s n o t s t o r e d i n t h e m a c h i n e : I n "...
  • Page 569 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 12 of 160 I f y o u h a v e c o n f i g u r e d " P r i n t i n g P o l i c y " o n t h e [ O p t i o n s ] t a b s o t h a t u s e r a u t h e n t i c a t i o n i s a l w a y s p e r f o r m e d , u s e r i n f o r m a t i o n c a n n o t b e e n t e r e d h e r e .
  • Page 570 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 13 of 160 Click the [OK] button to execute printing. 03-004.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 571 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 14 of 160 PRINTING IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT (WHEN USER AUTHENTICATION IS USED) Overview The user information (such as login name and password) that must be entered varies depending on the authentication method being used, so check with the administrator of the machine before printing. •...
  • Page 572 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 15 of 160 Select [Job Handling] and enter your user information. • When authentication is carried out using the login name/password, enter your login name in "Login Name" and your password (1 to 32 characters) in "Password". •...
  • Page 573 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 16 of 160 Click the [Print] button. I n M a c O S X , y o u c a n c l i c k t h e ( l o c k ) b u t t o n a f t e r e n t e r i n g y o u r l o g i n n a m e a n d p a s s w o r d , o r u s e r n u m b e r , t o s i m p l i f y o p e r a t i o n t h e n e x t t i m e y o u w i s h t o p r i n t b a s e d o n t h e s a m e u s e r a u t h e n t i c a t i o n .
  • Page 574 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 17 of 160 PAPER FEEDING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT Before printing, check the paper sizes, paper types, and paper remaining in the machine's trays. To check the most recent tray information, click the [Tray Status] button in [Paper Selection] on the [Paper] tab.
  • Page 575 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 18 of 160 S p e c i a l m e d i a s u c h a s e n v e l o p e s c a n a l s o b e p l a c e d i n t h e b y p a s s t r a y . F o r t h e p r o c e d u r e f o r l o a d i n g p a p e r i n t h e b y p a s s t r a y , s e e "...
  • Page 576 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 19 of 160 PAPER FEEDING IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT This section explains the [Paper Feed] settings in the print settings window. • When [Auto Select] is selected: A tray that is set for plain or recycled paper (only plain paper in the factory default setting) of the size specified in "Paper Size"...
  • Page 577 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 20 of 160 T o e x c l u d e t h e b y p a s s t r a y f r o m t h e t r a y s t h a t c a n b e s e l e c t e d w h e n [ A u t o S e l e c t ] i s s e l e c t e d : I n "...
  • Page 578 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 21 of 160 PRINTING ON ENVELOPES IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT Overview The bypass tray can be used for envelope printing. • F o r t h e t y p e s o f p a p e r t h a t c a n b e u s e d i n t h e b y p a s s t r a y , s e e "...
  • Page 579 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 22 of 160 Select [Envelope] from the "Paper Type" menu. S e t t h e p a p e r t y p e o f t h e b y p a s s t r a y t o [ E n v e l o p e ] a n d l o a d a n e n v e l o p e i n t o t h e b y p a s s t r a y .
  • Page 580 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 23 of 160 PRINTING ON ENVELOPES IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT Overview The bypass tray can be used for envelope printing. • F o r t h e t y p e s o f p a p e r t h a t c a n b e u s e d i n t h e b y p a s s t r a y , s e e "...
  • Page 581 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 24 of 160 Select [Paper Feed] in the print settings window. Select [Bypass Tray (Envelope)] from the "All pages from" menu. S e t t h e p a p e r t y p e o f t h e b y p a s s t r a y t o [ E n v e l o p e ] a n d l o a d a n e n v e l o p e i n t o t h e b y p a s s t r a y .
  • Page 582: Viewing Printer Driver Help

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 25 of 160 VIEWING PRINTER DRIVER HELP Overview When you want to view the explanations of the settings of the printer driver in a Windows environment, display the Help window of the printer driver. Pop-up help Help can be displayed for a setting by clicking the setting and pressing the [F1] key.
  • Page 583 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 26 of 160 Click the [Help] button. The Help window will open to let you view explanations of the settings on the tab. To view Help for settings in a dialog box, click the underlined text at the top of the Help window.
  • Page 584 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 27 of 160 SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF PRINTING Overview Settings configured on each of the tabs at the time of printing can be saved as user settings. Saving frequently used settings or complex color settings under an assigned name makes it easy to select those settings the next time you need to use them.
  • Page 585 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 28 of 160 Check the displayed settings. Enter a name for the settings using up to 20 characters and click the [OK] button. 03-013.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 586: Using Saved Settings

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 29 of 160 USING SAVED SETTINGS Overview You can specify the saved user settings through just one click to apply frequently used settings or complicated color settings to your printing. Operation Select the machine's printer driver from the print window of the application, and click the [Detail] button.
  • Page 587 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 30 of 160 03-014.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 588: Changing The Printer Driver Default Settings

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 31 of 160 CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER DEFAULT SETTINGS Overview You can change the default settings of the printer driver. Changes you have made in the printer driver properties window when you execute printing from the application are returned to the default settings specified here when you exit the application.
  • Page 589 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 32 of 160 I n W i n d o w s X P / S e r v e r 2 0 0 3 / V i s t a , c l i c k t h e i c o n o f t h e p r i n t e r d r i v e r o f t h e m a c h i n e .
  • Page 590 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 33 of 160 Configure the settings and click the [OK] button. For explanations of the settings, see printer driver Help. 03-015.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 591: Selecting The Color Mode

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 34 of 160 SELECTING THE COLOR MODE Overview The following three selections are available for the "Color Mode" (a set of colors used for printing): Automatic: The machine automatically determines whether each page is color or black and white and prints the page accordingly.
  • Page 592 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 35 of 160 • W h e n t h e a p p l i c a t i o n t r e a t s t h e d a t a a s c o l o r d a t a e v e n t h o u g h t h e d a t a i s b l a c k a n d w h i t e .
  • Page 593 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 36 of 160 Macintosh Select [Color] and select "Color Mode". 03-016.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 594: Selecting The Resolution

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 37 of 160 SELECTING THE RESOLUTION Overview The following three selections are available for "Print Mode" (resolution): Normal: This mode is suitable for printing data such as regular text or a table. High The print quality of color photos and text is high. Quality: Ultra Fine: Select this mode to print color photos more clearly or graphic gradation images more finely.
  • Page 595 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 38 of 160 Macintosh Select [Color] and select "Print Mode". 03-017.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 596: Sided Printing

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 39 of 160 2-SIDED PRINTING Overview The machine can print on both sides of the paper. This function is useful for many purposes, and is particularly convenient when you want to create a simple pamphlet. 2-sided printing also helps conserve paper.
  • Page 597 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 40 of 160 Click the [Main] tab and select [2-Sided(Book)] or [2- Sided(Tablet)]. I f n e c e s s a r y , y o u c a n s e l e c t t h e m e t h o d o f i m p l e m e n t i n g 2 - s i d e d p r i n t i n g .
  • Page 598: Fitting The Print Image To The Paper

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 41 of 160 FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER Overview This function automatically enlarges or reduces the print image to match the size of the paper loaded in the machine. This function is convenient when enlarging a letter or A4 size document to ledger or A3 size to make it easier to view, or when printing a document on paper that is different in size from the original document.
  • Page 599 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 42 of 160 Select [Fit To Paper Size] and select the actual paper size to be used for printing (for example: Legal). Macintosh Select [Paper Handling] and check the paper size for the print image (for example: Letter). To change the print image size, use the "Paper Size"...
  • Page 600: Printing Multiple Pages On One Page

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 43 of 160 PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE Overview This function reduces the print image and prints multiple pages on a single sheet of paper. You can print only the first page in the original size and print multiple reduced pages on the subsequent sheets.
  • Page 601 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 44 of 160 ◦ T h e p a g e o r d e r s f o r 6 - U p , 8 - U p , 9 - U p , a n d 1 6 - U p a r e t h e s a m e a s f o r 4 - U p .
  • Page 602 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 45 of 160 Printing only the first page in the original size (for PCL6 only) Click the [Special Modes] tab. Select [Layout Print] and click the [Settings] button. Select [N-Up w/o 1st Page]. In "N-Up Printing", select the number of images per sheet and click the [OK] button.
  • Page 603 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 46 of 160 Macintosh Select [Layout] and select the number of pages per sheet. Select the order of the pages. If you wish to print borderlines, select the desired type of borderline. 03-020.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 604 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 47 of 160 PRINTING WHILE SKIPPING BLANK PAGES Overview If the scanned original contains blank pages, the blank pages are skipped during printing. The machine detects blank pages and does not print them. This eliminates unnecessary printing without you having to check for blank pages before printing.
  • Page 605 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 48 of 160 Click the [Disable Blank Page Print] checkbox to set it to 03-020_1.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 606: Punch Function

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 49 of 160 STAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN OUTPUT Overview Staple function The staple function staples the output. To create materials with a more sophisticated appearance, the staple function can be used in combination with 2-sided printing. This function saves considerable time when preparing handouts for a meeting or other stapled materials.
  • Page 607 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 50 of 160 The punch function punches holes in the output. The punch hole positions are set by selecting the binding edge. L e f t R i g h t T o p • A f i n i s h e r o r s a d d l e f i n i s h e r i s r e q u i r e d t o u s e t h e s t a p l e f u n c t i o n .
  • Page 608 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 51 of 160 Click the [Main] tab and select "Binding Edge". Select the staple function or the punch function. • For the staple function, select the number of staples in the "Staple" menu. • For the punch function, click the [Punch] checkbox so that the checkmark appears.
  • Page 609 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 52 of 160 03-021.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 610 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 53 of 160 CREATE A STAPLED PAMPHLET (PAMPHLET COPY/SADDLE STITCH) Overview The pamphlet function prints on the front and back of each sheet of paper so that the sheets can be folded and bound to create a pamphlet.
  • Page 611 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 54 of 160 • W h e n [ M u l t i p l e P a m p h l e t S t y l e ( A c t u a l S i z e ) ] i s s e l e c t e d , p a p e r t w i c e t h e s i z e s p e c i f i e d i n t h e a p p l i c a t i o n i s u s e d f o r p r i n t i n g .
  • Page 612 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 55 of 160 Select [Tiled Pamphlet] or [2-Up Pamphlet]. 03-022.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 613 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 56 of 160 PRINTING WITH MARGIN SHIFT SETTING (MARGIN) Overview This function shifts the print image to increase the margin at the left, the right, or the top of the paper. If a finisher or saddle finisher is installed, the staple and punch functions of the machine can also be used together.
  • Page 614 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 57 of 160 Macintosh Select [Printer Features] and select "Binding Edge". Select "Margin Shift". 03-023.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 615 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 58 of 160 CREATE A LARGE POSTER (POSTER PRINTING) Overview One page of print data is enlarged and printed using multiple sheets of paper (4 sheets (2 x 2), 9 sheets (3 x 3) or 16 sheets (4 x 4)). The sheets can then be attached together to create a large poster.
  • Page 616 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 59 of 160 From the pull-down menu, select the number of sheets of paper to be used. If you wish to print borderlines and/or use the overlap function, click the corresponding checkboxes so that the checkmark appears.
  • Page 617: Print Position

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 60 of 160 ADJUST PRINT POSITION ON ODD AND EVEN PAGES SEPARATELY (PRINT POSITION) Overview This function sets different print positions (margins) separately for odd and even pages and prints the pages. • T h i s f u n c t i o n i s a v a i l a b l e i n a W i n d o w s e n v i r o n m e n t . •...
  • Page 618 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 61 of 160 03-063.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 619 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 62 of 160 ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES (ROTATE 180 DEGREES) Overview This feature rotates the image 180 degrees so that it can be printed correctly on paper that can be loaded in only one orientation (such as envelopes or paper with punch holes).
  • Page 620 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 63 of 160 Macintosh Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu and click the button. Click the [OK] button. 03-025.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 621 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 64 of 160 ENLARGING/REDUCING THE PRINT IMAGE (ZOOM SETTING/ENLARGE OR REDUCE) Overview This function enlarges or reduces the image to a selected percentage. When using the PS printer driver (Windows), you can set the width and length percentages separately to change the proportion of the image (XY Zoom).
  • Page 622 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 65 of 160 Macintosh Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu and enter the ratio (%). Click the [OK] button. 03-026.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 623 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 66 of 160 ADJUST THE LINE THICKNESS (LINE THICKNESS) Overview This function increases the thickness of the entire line when the print lines are not clear in CAD or other special applications. When the data includes lines of varying widths, you can print all lines at the minimum width as necessary.
  • Page 624 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 67 of 160 C l i c k t h e [ C o m p a t i b i l i t y ] b u t t o n a n d s e l e c t t h e u n i t s f r o m t h e "...
  • Page 625 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 68 of 160 PRINT A MIRROR-IMAGE (MIRROR- IMAGE REVERSE/VISUAL EFFECTS) Overview The image is reversed to create a mirror image. This function is conveniently used to print a design for a woodblock print or other printing medium. I n a W i n d o w s e n v i r o n m e n t , t h i s f u n c t i o n i s o n l y a v a i l a b l e w h e n u s i n g t h e P S p r i n t e r d r i v e r .
  • Page 626 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 69 of 160 03-028.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 627: Adjustment Settings

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 70 of 160 ADJUST THE BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST OF THE IMAGE (COLOR ADJUSTMENT SETTINGS) Overview This function adjusts the brightness and contrast in the print settings when a photo or other image is printed. This function makes simple corrections even if image editing software is not installed on your computer.
  • Page 628 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 71 of 160 Macintosh Select [Color] and click the [Color Adjustment...] button. Click the [Color Adjustment] checkbox so that the checkmark appears, and drag the slide bar to adjust the image. file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 629 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 72 of 160 03-029.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 630 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 73 of 160 PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN BLACK (TEXT TO BLACK/VECTOR TO BLACK) Overview When printing a color image in grayscale, text and lines that are drawn in faint colors are printed in black. This function allows you to bring out color text and lines that are faint and difficult to see when printed in grayscale.
  • Page 631 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 74 of 160 03-030.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 632: Color Settings

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 75 of 160 SELECTING COLOR SETTINGS TO MATCH THE IMAGE TYPE (ADVANCED COLOR SETTINGS) Overview Preset color settings are available in the machine's printer driver for various uses. These enable printing using the most suitable color settings for the color image type.
  • Page 633 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 76 of 160 CMYK Correction Corrects the image to obtain the optimum printing result when printing a CMYK image. Screening: Select the screening to modify the image to suit specific preferences, according to the appropriate image processing method.
  • Page 634 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 77 of 160 *3 Can only be used when using the PS printer driver (Windows/Macintosh). Operation Windows Click the [Color] tab and select [Image Type]. • Standard: Data that includes text, photos, graphs, etc. • Graphics: Data with many drawings or illustrations •...
  • Page 635 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 78 of 160 Click the [Advanced Color...] button and specify the settings. To configure color management using the Windows OS ICM, set "Original Type" to [Custom] in step 1. Then, click the [Windows ICM] checkbox so that the checkmark appears.
  • Page 636 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 79 of 160 Select [Image Type]. • Standard: Data that includes text, photos, graphs, etc. • Graphics: Data with many drawings or illustrations • Photo: Photo data or data that uses photos • CAD: Engineering drawing data •...
  • Page 637 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 80 of 160 [CMYK Simulation] checkbox to set to and then select the desired setting. • I n M a c O S X 1 0 . 5 , 1 0 . 6 , 1 0 . 7 , a n d 1 0 . 8 , c l i c k t h e [ A d v a n c e d C o l o r .
  • Page 638 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 81 of 160 ADDING A WATERMARK TO PRINTED PAGES (WATERMARK) Overview This function adds faint shadow-like text as a watermark in the background of the printed image. The size, color, exposure, and angle of the watermark text can be adjusted. The watermark text can be selected from the previously registered text in the list.
  • Page 639 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 82 of 160 Macintosh Select [Watermarks]. Click the [Watermark] checkbox and configure watermark settings. • Configure detailed watermark settings such as selection of the text and editing of the font and color. • Adjust the size and angle of the text by dragging the slide 03-032.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 640 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 83 of 160 PRINTING AN IMAGE OVER THE PRINT DATA (IMAGE STAMP) Overview This function prints a bitmap or JPEG image stored on your PC over the print data. This function prints a frequently used image or an icon of your own creation as if it is stamped on the print data.
  • Page 641 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 84 of 160 • If you have not stored an image stamp, click the [Image File], select the file you wish to use for the image stamp, and click the [Add] button. 03-033.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 642 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 85 of 160 OVERLAY A FIXED FORM ON THE PRINT DATA (OVERLAYS) Overview This function overlays data on a fixed form you have prepared. By creating table rulings or a decorative frame in an application different from that of the text file and registering the data as an overlay file, an attractive print result can be easily obtained without the need for complex manipulations.
  • Page 643: Printing With An Overlay File

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 86 of 160 Click the [Advanced] tab and click the [Edit] button in [Overlays]. Click the [Create Overlay] button and specify the name and folder to be used for the overlay file that you wish to create.
  • Page 644 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 87 of 160 A previously created or stored overlay file can be selected from the pull-down menu. 03-034.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 645 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 88 of 160 PRINTING SPECIFIC PAGES ON DIFFERENT PAPER (DIFFERENT PAPER) Overview In a Windows environment The front and back covers and specified pages of a document are printed on paper that is different from the other pages. Use this function when you wish to print the front and back covers on heavy paper, or insert colored paper or a different paper type at specified pages.
  • Page 646 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 89 of 160 Click the [Special Modes] tab. Select [Different Paper] and click the [Settings] button. Select the paper insertion settings. • Select the insertion position, paper source, and printing method from the corresponding menus. •...
  • Page 647 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 90 of 160 i n s e r t s c a n n o t b e s u c c e s s i v e l y i n s e r t e d a t t h e s a m e p a g e . W h e n "...
  • Page 648 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 91 of 160 ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON TRANSPARENCY FILM (TRANSPARENCY INSERTS) Overview When transparency film is used for printing, this function prevents the sheets of transparency film from sticking together by inserting a sheet of paper between each sheet of film. As necessary, the same content as that printed on each sheet of transparency film is also printed on the corresponding sheet of inserted paper.
  • Page 649 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 92 of 160 S e t t h e p a p e r t y p e o f t h e b y p a s s t r a y t o [ O H P ] a n d l o a d t r a n s p a r e n c y f i l m i n t o t h e b y p a s s t r a y .
  • Page 650 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 93 of 160 S e t t h e p a p e r t y p e o f t h e b y p a s s t r a y t o [ O H P ] a n d l o a d t r a n s p a r e n c y f i l m i n t o t h e b y p a s s t r a y .
  • Page 651 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 94 of 160 PRINTING A CARBON COPY (CARBON COPY) Overview This function prints an additional copy of the print image on paper that is of the same size but from a different paper tray. For example, if carbon copy print is selected when plain paper is loaded into tray 1 and colored paper is loaded into tray 2, a print result similar to a carbon copy slip is obtained with a single selection of the print command.
  • Page 652 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 95 of 160 Click the [Special Modes] tab. Select [Carbon Copy] and click the [Settings] button. Select the tray for the first copy from "Top Copy", and then select the tray for the carbon copy from "Carbon Copy".
  • Page 653 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 96 of 160 PRINTING TEXT ON TABS OF TAB PAPER (TAB PAPER SETTINGS/TAB PAPER PRINT) Overview There are two methods of printing on the tabs of tab paper: "Tab Paper Settings" and "Tab Paper Print". Tab Paper Settings Create the text to be printed on tab paper in an application, and set the distance of shifting the text in [Tab Paper Settings] on the...
  • Page 654 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 97 of 160 • T h e s e f u n c t i o n s a r e a v a i l a b l e i n a W i n d o w s e n v i r o n m e n t . •...
  • Page 655 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 98 of 160 Tab Paper Print (for PCL6 only) Open the data into which you wish to insert tab paper, and then select the settings. Click the [Special Modes] tab. Select [Tab Paper Print] and click the [Settings] button. Select the tab position settings.
  • Page 656 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 99 of 160 • S e t t h e p a p e r t y p e o f t h e b y p a s s t r a y t o [ T a b P a p e r ] a n d l o a d t a b p a p e r s i n t o t h e b y p a s s t r a y .
  • Page 657 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 100 of 160 TWO-SIDED PRINTING WITH SPECIFIC PAGES PRINTED ON THE FRONT SIDE (CHAPTER INSERTS) Overview This function prints specific pages on the front side of the paper. When you specify a page (such as a chapter cover page) to be printed on the front side of the paper, it is printed on the front side of the next sheet even if it would normally be printed on the reverse side of the paper.
  • Page 658 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 101 of 160 Click the [Special Modes] tab. Select [Chapter Inserts] and click the [Settings] button. Enter the page numbers that are to begin chapters in "Page Setup" and click the [Add] button. Your settings will appear in "Information". When you have finished selecting settings, click the [Save] button in "User Settings"...
  • Page 659 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 102 of 160 FOLDING PRINTED PAPER IN HALF (FOLD) Overview This function folds printed paper in half when a saddle finisher is installed on the machine. You can choose whether the output is folded inward or outward. T h i s f u n c t i o n c a n n o t b e u s e d w h e n [ S y s t e m S e t t i n g s ] i n "...
  • Page 660 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 103 of 160 Macintosh Select [Printer Features]. Select [Paper Folding Settings] and select the desired folding method. 03-040.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 661 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 104 of 160 INSERT PRESET DATA BEFORE OR AFTER EACH PAGE (PAGE INTERLEAVE) Overview This function inserts a preset data item into every page during printing. You can easily create documents with opened page spread that is made up of text on the left-hand page and a memo space on the right-hand page.
  • Page 662 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 105 of 160 Y o u h a v e t o c r e a t e p a g e d a t a t o b e i n s e r t e d i n a d v a n c e . F o r t h e p r o c e d u r e f o r c r e a t i n g p a g e d a t a , s e e "...
  • Page 663 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 106 of 160 PRINT THE SAME IMAGE IN TILE PATTERN (REPEAT PRINT) Overview This function prints the same image in tile pattern on a sheet. This is useful for producing name cards and stickers. • T h i s f u n c t i o n i s a v a i l a b l e i n a W i n d o w s e n v i r o n m e n t .
  • Page 664 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 107 of 160 In "N-Up Printing", select the number of images per sheet and click the [OK] button. 03-067.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 665 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 108 of 160 PRINTING PATTERN DATA (HIDDEN PATTERN PRINT) Overview This function prints pattern data such as "DO NOT COPY" behind the print data. If paper with pattern data is duplicated, the pattern data emerges in the background, which will help to prevent information from being leaked through unauthorized document copying.
  • Page 666 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 109 of 160 T h e h i d d e n p a t t e r n p r i n t i n g f u n c t i o n c a n n o t b e u s e d w h e n " P r i n t M o d e "...
  • Page 667 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 110 of 160 b a c k g r o u n d p a t t e r n i s p r i n t e d e v e n i f a c y a n o r m a g e n t a p a t t e r n i s s e l e c t e d .
  • Page 668 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 111 of 160 CHANGING THE RENDERING METHOD AND PRINTING JPEG IMAGES (PROCESS JPEG IMAGES USING THE DRIVER) Overview In some situations, a document containing a JPEG image may not be printed correctly. This can be solved by changing the way the JPEG image is rendered.
  • Page 669 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 112 of 160 03-066.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 670 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 113 of 160 PRINTING AT A PSEUDO-ENHANCED RESOLUTION (SMOOTHING) Overview Resolution enhancement techniques (RETs) are used to smoothen the outlines of images. The images are printed at a pseudo-enhanced resolution. T h i s f u n c t i o n i s a v a i l a b l e i n a W i n d o w s e n v i r o n m e n t . Operation Windows Click the [Advanced] tab and click the [Compatibility]...
  • Page 671 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 114 of 160 03-068.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 672 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 115 of 160 USING TWO MACHINES TO PRINT A LARGE PRINT JOB (TANDEM PRINT) Overview To use this function, two machines that can perform tandem printing are required. Two machines connected to the same network are used to run a large copy job in parallel.
  • Page 673 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 116 of 160 I n a M a c i n t o s h e n v i r o n m e n t , t h i s f u n c t i o n i s o n l y a v a i l a b l e w h e n u s i n g M a c O S X .
  • Page 674 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 117 of 160 T o u s e t h e t a n d e m p r i n t f u n c t i o n , y o u m u s t s e l e c t t h e p r o t o c o l t o b e u s e d , i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e m e s s a g e t h a t a p p e a r s o n t h e s c r e e n w h e n y o u a d d t h e p r i n t e r d r i v e r i n t h e "...
  • Page 675: Saving And Using Print Files

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 118 of 160 SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES (FORCE RETENTION/DOCUMENT FILING) Overview This function stores a print job as a file on the machine's hard drive, allowing the job to be printed from the touch panel when needed. The location for storing a file can be selected to prevent the file from being mixed together with files of other users.
  • Page 676 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 119 of 160 • F o r t h e p r o c e d u r e f o r p r i n t i n g f i l e s s t o r e d o n t h e m a c h i n e ' s h a r d d r i v e , s e e "...
  • Page 677 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 120 of 160 Select the folder to store the file in "Document Filing Settings". When you have selected [Custom Folder], click the [Stored to] button to select the folder. • W h e n [ Q u i c k F i l e ] i s s e l e c t e d , " R e t e n t i o n S e t t i n g s " w i l l b e s e t t o [ H o l d A f t e r P r i n t ] .
  • Page 678 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 121 of 160 • I f y o u h a v e c o n f i g u r e d t o a l w a y s u s e t h e f o r c e r e t e n t i o n f u n c t i o n i n "...
  • Page 679 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 122 of 160 • W h e n [ Q u i c k F i l e ] i s s e l e c t e d , " R e t e n t i o n S e t t i n g s " w i l l b e s e t t o [ H o l d A f t e r P r i n t ] .
  • Page 680: Automatically Print All Stored Data

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 123 of 160 AUTOMATICALLY PRINT ALL STORED DATA Overview When user authentication is enabled on the machine, all retained (stored) print jobs of the user who logs in are automatically printed. After all jobs are printed, the stored jobs are deleted. T o u s e t h e P r i n t A l l f u n c t i o n , t h e f o l l o w i n g s t e p s a r e n e c e s s a r y : •...
  • Page 681 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 124 of 160 Operation Enter your user number or login name and password in the user authentication screen of the machine. At the time of retention print, in addition to the user authentication information, enter the user name stored in the machine in "User Name"...
  • Page 682 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 125 of 160 PRINTING AND SENDING SIMULTANEOUSLY Overview This function prints data created in an application from the machine and simultaneously sends the data to the addresses stored in the machine. This function allows you to complete two tasks, printing and sending, with one operation from the printer driver.
  • Page 683 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 126 of 160 Click the [Job Handling] tab and click the [Print and Send] button. Select the [Print and Send] checkbox so that the checkmark appears. Click the [Get Address Book] button. From the "Address Book" list, select the address to which you wish to send the data, and click the [Add] button to add the address to the "Destination"...
  • Page 684 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 127 of 160 03-075.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 685: Printer Driver

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 128 of 160 EXTENSION OF PRINTABLE FILES When you do not have the printer driver installed on your PC, or when the application used to open a file that you wish to print is not available, you can print directly to the machine without using the printer driver.
  • Page 686 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 129 of 160 DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON AN FTP SERVER Overview When an FTP server is configured, you can directly select and print files on the FTP server from the touch panel of the machine. This function eliminates the need for downloading the files from the FTP server to your PC and sending print jobs from the PC to the machine.
  • Page 687 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 130 of 160 Tap the key of the file that you wish to print, and tap the [Choose Print Settings] key on the action panel. • When printing multiple files, tap the keys of the files you wish to print, and tap the [Print] key on the action panel.
  • Page 688 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 131 of 160 • If you have selected multiple files in step 4, you can select only the number of prints. • If you have selected a file that includes print conditions (i.e., PCL, PS, or XPS files) in step 4, the settings will be applied.
  • Page 689: Directly Printing A File In Usb Memory

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 132 of 160 DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN USB MEMORY Overview Files in a USB memory device connected to the machine are printed from the operation panel of the machine without using the printer driver. When the printer driver of the machine is not installed on your PC, you can copy a file into a commercially available USB memory device and connect the device to the machine to print the file directly.
  • Page 690 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 133 of 160 Tap the key of the file that you wish to print, and tap the [Choose Print Settings] key on the action panel. • When printing multiple files, tap the keys of the files you wish to print, and tap the [Print] key on the action panel.
  • Page 691 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 134 of 160 W h e n t h e [ P r i n t o n G l o s s y P a p e r ] c h e c k b o x i s s e l e c t e d , [ P a p e r S e l e c t ] i s s e t t o [ G l o s s y P a p e r ] ( b y p a s s t r a y ) a n d [ O u t p u t R e s o l u t i o n ] i s s e t t o [ 6 0 0 d p i ( H i g h Q u a l i t y ) ] .
  • Page 692: Directly Printing A File In A Network Folder

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 135 of 160 DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN A NETWORK FOLDER Overview You can specify and print a file in a network folder from the touch panel of the machine. Even if the network folder is not registered, you can access the network folder by directly entering or referring to the path to the folder in the workgroup.
  • Page 693 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 136 of 160 Tap the [Select File from Network Folder to Print] key on the action panel. Tap the [Open Registered Network Folder] key on the action panel and tap the network folder that you wish to access.
  • Page 694 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 137 of 160 • A t o t a l o f 1 0 0 k e y s o f f i l e s a n d f o l d e r s c a n b e d i s p l a y e d . •...
  • Page 695 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 138 of 160 Entering the network folder path directly Tap the [Direct Input of Folder Path] key in step 3 of "Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine's settings". Enter the path to the folder, user name and password.
  • Page 696 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 139 of 160 Tap the key of the network folder that you wish to access. Access the network folder. For the procedure for printing, see steps 4 to 6 of "Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine's settings".
  • Page 697 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 140 of 160 SUBMIT PRINT JOB By selecting [Document Operations] → [Submit Print Job] from "Setting Mode (Web version)" and specifying a file, you can directly print the file without using the printer driver. In addition to a file on your PC, this procedure can be used to print any file that can be accessed from your PC, such as a file on another PC connected to the same network.
  • Page 698: Ftp Print

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 141 of 160 FTP PRINT You can print a file from your PC by simply dragging and dropping the file onto the FTP server of the machine. T o p e r f o r m F T P p r i n t : I n "...
  • Page 699: E-Mail Print

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 142 of 160 E-MAIL PRINT If you configure your e-mail account in the machine, the machine periodically checks your mail server and automatically prints received e -mail attachments without using the printer driver. T o p e r f o r m e - m a i l p r i n t : I n "...
  • Page 700 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 143 of 160 P U N C H O F F , O N P u n c h O U T P U T C O L L A T E O F F , O N 2 - s i d e d P r i n t D U P L E X O F F , T O P , L E F T , R I G H T...
  • Page 701 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 144 of 160 " S e t t i n g m o d e " → [ S y s t e m S e t t i n g s ] → [ P r i n t e r C o n d i t i o n S e t t i n g s ] →...
  • Page 702: Printing An Encrypted Pdf File

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 145 of 160 PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE Overview PDF encryption is used to protect a PDF file by requiring the entry of a password to print or edit the file. To directly print an encrypted PDF file on an FTP server or in a USB memory device, etc.
  • Page 703 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 146 of 160 Tap the [Enter Password for Encrypted PDF] key on the action panel. Enter the password (32 characters or less) and tap the [Yes] key. W h e n b o t h a m a s t e r p a s s w o r d a n d a u s e r p a s s w o r d ( w h i c h i s u s e d t o o p e n t h e f i l e ) h a v e b e e n s e t , e n t e r t h e m a s t e r p a s s w o r d .
  • Page 704 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 147 of 160 CHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUT Overview If printing stops because the machine ran out of paper, or if the size of paper specified in the printer driver is not loaded in the machine, a message will appear in the touch panel.
  • Page 705: Printer Jobs

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 148 of 160 PRINTER JOBS When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To check the status of a printer job, tap the [Print] tab. When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing, see the following items: •...
  • Page 706 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 149 of 160 REGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGE Overview This function registers images used as custom images from the printer driver to the machine. • T h i s f u n c t i o n i s a v a i l a b l e i n a W i n d o w s e n v i r o n m e n t . •...
  • Page 707 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 150 of 160 I f y o u h a v e a t t e m p t e d t o s t o r e m u l t i p l e p a g e s o f d a t a , o n l y t h e f i r s t p a g e w i l l b e s t o r e d .
  • Page 708: Macintosh Environment

    USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 151 of 160 SPECIFYING A BILLING CODE USING THE PRINTER DRIVER Overview You can enter a billing code using the printer of the machine. When using the printer, you can only enter a billing code by directly typing it in. For an overview of a billing code, refer to "BILLING CODE".
  • Page 709 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 152 of 160 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine I n W i n d o w s X P / S e r v e r 2 0 0 3 / V i s t a , c l i c k t h e p r i n t e r d r i v e r i c o n o f t h e m a c h i n e .
  • Page 710 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 153 of 160 Click the [Configuration] tab, then click the [Printing Policy] button. Set the [Billing Code] check box to , then click the [OK] button. Operation Windows Start printing file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 711 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 154 of 160 Enter the main code and sub code, then click the [OK] button. To retain the specified billing code, set [Always Use This Billing Code] to • I f y o u s e l e c t " S e t t i n g M o d e ( A d m i n i s t r a t o r ) " - [ B i l l i n g C o d e S e t t i n g ] - [ A d m i n i s t r a t i o n S e t t i n g s ] a n d s e t [ U s e B i l l i n g C o d e ] t o E n a b l e , t h e s p e c i f i e d b i l l i n g c o d e i s d i s a b l e d , a n d i t i s n o t r e c o r d e d i n t h e j o b l o g .
  • Page 712 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 155 of 160 Enter the main code and sub code 03-062_1.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 713 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 156 of 160 PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS LIST W i n d o w s M a c i n t o s F u n c t i o n P C L 6 P P D h P P D F r e q u e n t l y u C o p i e s...
  • Page 714 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 157 of 160 O u t p u t t r a Y e s Y e s Y e s Y e s C o n v e n i e n t p P a m p h l e t Y e s Y e s...
  • Page 715 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 158 of 160 C h a p t e r D i Y e s v i d i n g P a g e i n t e r l Y e s e a v e H a l f F o l d / H a l f F o l d H a l f F o l d...
  • Page 716 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 159 of 160 C O L O R M O D T e x t T o B l Y e s Y e s E A D J U S T I N a c k / V e c t o r G F U N C T I O N T o B l a c k A d v a n c e d...
  • Page 717 USER'S MANUAL - PRINTER Page 160 of 160 * 2   I f   a   f i n i s h e r   o r   a   s a d d l e   f i n i s h e r   i s   i n s t a l l e d   ( T h e   p u n c h   m o d u l e   i s   a l s o   r e q u i r e d   i n  ...
  • Page 718 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 1 of 207 Digital full-color multifunction machine MX-4140N/MX- 4141N/MX-5140N/MX-5141N PRINTING "FAX" file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 719: Before Using The Machine As A Fax

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 2 of 207 BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A Connect to the telephone line. Insert the plug on one end of the telephone line cord into the telephone line jack (LINE) of the machine as shown, and insert the other plug into a wall telephone jack.
  • Page 720: Checking The Date And Time

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 3 of 207 I f t h e f a x f u n c t i o n w i l l b e u s e d , a n d , i n p a r t i c u l a r , i f r e c e p t i o n o r t i m e r t r a n s m i s s i o n w i l l t a k e p l a c e a t n i g h t , d o n o t t u r n t h e m a i n p o w e r o f f .
  • Page 721: Fax Mode

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 4 of 207 T o s e t t h e d a t e a n d t i m e o f t h e m a c h i n e : I n "...
  • Page 722 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 5 of 207 SELECTING FAX MODE You can select the fax mode from the Home Screen or from each operation mode as follows: Operation Changing modes from the Home Screen Tap the [Fax] mode icon The initial screen of fax modeis displayed.
  • Page 723: Base Screen Of Fax Mode

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 6 of 207 BASE SCREEN OF FAX MODE 04-007.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 724: Fax Transmission Sequence

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 7 of 207 FAX TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE First, tap the [Fax] icon on the home screen to enter fax mode. • SELECTING FAX MODE Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
  • Page 725 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 8 of 207 • ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK • THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS • USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK •...
  • Page 726 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 9 of 207 • AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL(2- SIDED ORIGINAL) • AUTO DETECTION • SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE • SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES • SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE •...
  • Page 727 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 10 of 207 Send the original. Tap the [Start] key. • Y o u c a n c h e c k t h e p r e v i e w i m a g e b y t a p p i n g t h e [ P r e v i e w ] k e y b e f o r e t a p p i n g t h e [ S t a r t ] k e y .
  • Page 728 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 11 of 207 S c a n ] k e y t o s c a n t h e n e x t o r i g i n a l . T h e n , t a p t h e [ S t a r t ] k e y t o s e n d t h e o r i g i n a l .
  • Page 729 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 12 of 207 ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS Tap numeric keys to enter the destination fax number. I f y o u w a n t t o e n t e r a p a u s e b e t w e e n d i g i t s o f t h e n u m b e r : T h e [ P a u s e ] k e y a p p e a r s o n t h e n u m e r i c k e y s w h e n t h e d e s t i n a t i o n f a x n u m b e r i s e n t e r e d .
  • Page 730 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 13 of 207 T h e [ P a u s e ] k e y a p p e a r s o n t h e n u m e r i c k e y s w h e n t h e d e s t i n a t i o n f a x n u m b e r i s e n t e r e d .
  • Page 731 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 14 of 207 RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK Overview A destination fax number is retrieved by simply tapping the one- touch key of that destination on the address book screen. (One-touch dialing) It is also possible to store multiple fax numbers in a one-touch key, allowing you to retrieve all the numbers by simply tapping the key.
  • Page 732 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 15 of 207 Operation Tap the [Address Book] key. Tap a one-touch key of contact or group that includes the fax destination. • The destinations displayed on the list can be narrowed with categories, job types, indexes, and keywords. •...
  • Page 733 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 16 of 207 T a p t h e k e y a g a i n t o c a n c e l t h e s e l e c t i o n . •...
  • Page 734: Deleting Specified Destinations

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 17 of 207 THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS Overview When multiple destinations have been selected, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a destination (cancel selection of the destination) if necessary. Operation Tap the [Confirm Address] key on the action panel. Confirm the destination.
  • Page 735 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 18 of 207 USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION The search number can be used to specify a destination stored in an address book. Tap the [Call Search Number] key. Enter a search number (4 digits) using the numeric keys and tap When the search number is entered, the stored address is retrieved and specified as a destination.
  • Page 736 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 19 of 207 RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK Overview If an LDAP server is configured in the setting mode (Web version), you can search for the desired destination in the global address book and obtain the fax number when performing a fax transmission.
  • Page 737 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 20 of 207 of [Item], and select an item to be searched from [Name] or [Address/Number]. H o w t o s e a r c h E n t e r t h e s e a r c h c h a r a c t e r s ( m a x i m u m o f 6 4 c h a r a c t e r s ) . T h e s y s t e m w i l l l o o k f o r n a m e s s t a r t i n g w i t h t h e e n t e r e d l e t t e r s .
  • Page 738 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 21 of 207 • T o c h e c k t h e d e s t i n a t i o n i n f o r m a t i o n : T a p t h e o n e - t o u c h k e y o f t h e t a r g e t d e s t i n a t i o n , a n d t h e n t a p t h e [ C o n f i r m D e s t i n a t i o n I n f o r m a t i o n ] k e y .
  • Page 739 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 22 of 207 USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Overview Select a destination from a transmission log and resend the data. The destinations of the most recent 50 transmissions by fax, Scan to E-mail, and/or Internet fax are stored. One of these can be selected to resend to that destination.
  • Page 740 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 23 of 207 Tap the key of the fax destination that you wish to redial. The last 50 addresses used for transmission are displayed. T o c a n c e l t h e r e s e n d s e t t i n g : T a p t h e h i g h l i g h t e d k e y .
  • Page 741 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 24 of 207 SENDING BY CHAIN DIALING Number sequences entered using the numeric keys and/or one-touch keys can be linked together with pauses and dialed as a single number. For example when dialing an international number, tap the [Pause] key between the identification number of an international telephone service company (e.g., "001") and the country code (e.g., "81"...
  • Page 742: Fax Transmission Methods

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 25 of 207 FAX TRANSMISSION METHODS The methods that can be used to send a fax from the machine are described below. Select the method that best suits your needs. • To fax a large number of sheet originals: •...
  • Page 743 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 26 of 207 Storing a fax job If transmission cannot begin immediately because the line is in use, all pages will be scanned and stored in memory. If you want to attempt to send a fax while another job is in progress, you can store the fax job. To check the stored fax job, display the job status screen.
  • Page 744 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 27 of 207 ◦ B r o a d c a s t t r a n s m i s s i o n , F - c o d e t r a n s m i s s i o n , T i m e r t r a n s m i s s i o n , D u a l P a g e S c a n , B o o k D i v i d e , 2 i n 1 , C a r d S h o t , J o b B u i l d , O r i g i n a l C o u n t •...
  • Page 745 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 28 of 207 • W h e n t h e d o c u m e n t g l a s s i s u s e d , m u l t i p l e o r i g i n a l p a g e s c a n n o t b e s c a n n e d a t a t i m e .
  • Page 746 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 29 of 207 04-025.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 747: Original Placement Orientation

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 30 of 207 ORIGINAL PLACEMENT ORIENTATION When an 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) original is placed in vertical orientation ( ), the image is automatically rotated 90 degrees and transmitted in horizontal orientation ( ) (Rotation Sending). If the original is placed in horizontal orientation ( ), it is transmitted in that orientation (...
  • Page 748 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 31 of 207 AUTOMATIC REDUCTION OF THE TRANSMITTED IMAGE If the width of the transmitted image is larger than the width of the paper in the receiving machine, the image will be automatically reduced to fit the receiving machine's paper width. Example: Reduced sizes and reduction ratios T r a n s m i t t e d i m a g R e c e i v i n g m a c h i n e ' s p...
  • Page 749: Transmittable Original Sizes

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 32 of 207 TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES The following original sizes can be transmitted M i n i m u m o r i g i n a l s i z e M a x i m u m o r i g i n a l s i z e U s i n g t h e a u t o m a t i c d o 5 - 1 / 8 "...
  • Page 750: The Size Of The Placed Original

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 33 of 207 THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL When a standard size original is placed, the original size is automatically detected and displayed in "Scan Size" in the base screen. • SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE •...
  • Page 751 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 34 of 207 I n c h - 3 1 1 " x 1 7 " , 8 - 1 / 2 " x 1 3 - 2 / 5 " ( 2 1 6 1 1 "...
  • Page 752: When The Line Is Busy

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 35 of 207 WHEN THE LINE IS BUSY If the line is busy when you send a fax, transmission will be attempted again automatically after a preset interval. This function only operates in memory transmission mode. In direct transmission mode or manual transmission mode, the transmission will be canceled.
  • Page 753 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 36 of 207 WHEN A COMMUNICATION ERROR OCCURS If a communication error occurs or the other fax machine does not answer the call within a preset period of time, transmission will automatically be attempted again after a preset interval This function only operates in memory transmission mode.
  • Page 754: Specify The Destination

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 37 of 207 FAX DEST. CONFIRMATION MODE This mode displays a destination confirmation message when a fax is sent to prevent accidental transmission to the wrong destination. Set it in setting mode. If a fax is sent while this function is enabled, an address confirmation message will appear when the [Start] key is tapped.
  • Page 755 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 38 of 207 If the destination is not correct, tap the [Cancel] key and select the destination again. • Y o u c a n s e l e c t m u l t i p l e o n e - t o u c h k e y s f o r c o n t a c t s o r g r o u p s i n c l u d i n g f a x d e s t i n a t i o n s .
  • Page 756 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 39 of 207 When a fax that was selected from the addresses sent recently has been resent A confirmation screen is displayed based on the method used to specify the destination during the previous transmission. 04-032.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 757 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 40 of 207 CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED Check the image that will be sent in the touch panel before transmission. If you tap the [Preview] key before scanning the original, you can check the status of the scanned image in the preview screen. As you can adjust the exposure and resolution to scan the original while checking it in the preview screen, you can send a better quality original to the destination.
  • Page 758 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 41 of 207 USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR TRANSMISSION Overview Storing scanned originals in machine's memory before transmitting them is called "Memory TX". This section explains how to scan the original through the automatic document feeder and send the data by the memory transmission function.
  • Page 759 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 42 of 207 • AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Specify the destination fax number. • ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK • THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS • USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION •...
  • Page 760 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 43 of 207 USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR FAXING IN DIRECT TX MODE Overview Sending a scanned original without saving it in the machine's memory is called "Direct TX". This section explains how to scan the original through the automatic document feeder and directly send it.
  • Page 761 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 44 of 207 Operation Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. • AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Tap the [Send Directly] key on the action panel. Specify the destination fax number. •...
  • Page 762 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 45 of 207 Tap the [Start] key to begin transmission. 04-034.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 763 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 46 of 207 USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR TRANSMISSION Overview Storing scanned originals in machine's memory before transmitting them is called "Memory TX". This section explains how to scan the original placed on the document glass and send the data by the memory transmission function.
  • Page 764 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 47 of 207 Specify the destination fax number. • ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK • THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS • USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION •...
  • Page 765 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 48 of 207 T o c a n c e l s c a n n i n g : T a p t h e [ S T O P ] k e y b e f o r e t h e [ R e a d - E n d ] k e y i s t a p p e d . •...
  • Page 766 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 49 of 207 USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TX MODE Overview Sending a scanned original without saving it in the machine's memory is called "Direct TX". This section explains how to scan the original placed on the document glass and directly send data.
  • Page 767 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 50 of 207 t h e o r i g i n a l s i z e d e t e c t o r p l a t e a n d p r e v e n t c o r r e c t d e t e c t i o n o f t h e d o c u m e n t s i z e .
  • Page 768 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 51 of 207 • T h e d e s t i n a t i o n c a n n o t b e r e t r i e v e d f r o m a g l o b a l a d d r e s s b o o k .
  • Page 769: Transmission Using The Speaker

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 52 of 207 TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKER Overview When the speaker is used to dial, the fax is sent after the number is dialed and the connection is established. • I f a p e r s o n a n s w e r s , y o u w i l l b e a b l e t o h e a r h i s o r h e r v o i c e , b u t y o u w i l l n o t b e a b l e t o s p e a k .
  • Page 770 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 53 of 207 A f t e r t a p p i n g t h e [ S p e a k e r ] k e y , u s e t h e s l i d e r t h a t i s d i s p l a y e d w h e n y o u t a p t h e [ S p e a k e r V o l u m e ] k e y o r u s e k e y t o a d j u s t t h e v o l u m e o f t h e s p e a k e r .
  • Page 771: Broadcast Transmission

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 54 of 207 SENDING THE SAME FAX TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS (BROADCAST TRANSMISSION) Overview You can send a fax to multiple destinations in a single operation when, for example, sending a report to branch offices in different regions.
  • Page 772 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 55 of 207 stored addresses, open the detail confirmation screen and remove the destination in the screen. When a one-touch key is used to dial, the number of fax numbers that are dialed is the number of destinations that are stored in the one-touch key.
  • Page 773 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 56 of 207 • DOCUMENT GLASS Specify all destinations. • ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK • THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS • USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION •...
  • Page 774 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 57 of 207 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. T a p t h e [ P r e v i e w ] k e y t o c h e c k t h e p r e v i e w o f a n i m a g e b e f o r e s e n d i n g a f a x .
  • Page 775 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 58 of 207 RESENDING TO UNSUCCESSFUL BROADCAST TRANSMISSION DESTINATIONS Overview The results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job status screen. If transmission to any of the destinations failed, resend the fax to those destinations. Operation Tap the job status display, and tapping the [Fax] tab.
  • Page 776 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 59 of 207 After tapping the [Sending Failed] tab, tap the [ Resending to all unsuccessful transmission destinations] key on the action panel to resend the image. T h e s t e p s t o f o l l o w a f t e r t h e [ R e s e n d i n g t o a l l u n s u c c e s s f u l t r a n s m i s s i o n d e s t i n a t i o n s ] k e y i s t a p p e d d i f f e r d e p e n d i n g o n w h e t h e r o r n o t t h e d o c u m e n t f i l i n g f u n c t i o n i s u s e d .
  • Page 777 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 60 of 207 SENDING A FAX DIRECTLY FROM A COMPUTER (PC-Fax) A file on a computer can be sent via the machine as a fax (PC-Fax function). Faxes are sent using the PC-Fax function in the same way that documents are printed.
  • Page 778 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 61 of 207 O n l y t r a n s m i s s i o n i s a v a i l a b l e f o r t h i s f u n c t i o n . F a x e s c a n n o t b e r e c e i v e d b y y o u r c o m p u t e r .
  • Page 779 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 62 of 207 AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-SIDED ORIGINAL) Overview The automatic document feeder will automatically scan both sides of the document. 2 - s i d e d s c a n n i n g a u t o m a t i c a l l y t u r n s o f f a f t e r t r a n s m i s s i o n h a s e n d e d .
  • Page 780 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 63 of 207 Operation After tapping the [Original] key, tap the [2-sided original type Book] key or the [2-sided original type Tablet] key. See the figure on the right to check the binding edge if the original and select the key to be tapped.
  • Page 781 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 64 of 207 AUTO DETECTION When the original is placed, its size is automatically detected. The size of the placed original is indicated as the "Scan Size", and the size to be transmitted is indicated as the "Send size" in the base screen.
  • Page 782 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 65 of 207 • W h e n t h e o r i g i n a l s i z e i s a n i n c h s i z e o r a n o n - s t a n d a r d s i z e , o r i f t h e s i z e i s n o t d e t e c t e d c o r r e c t l y , m a n u a l l y s p e c i f y t h e o r i g i n a l s c a n s i z e .
  • Page 783 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 66 of 207 SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE Overview When the original size is not standard (inch size or non-standard size) or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size. • W h e n [ L o n g S i z e ] i s s e l e c t e d , t h e 2 - s i d e d s c a n n i n g s e t t i n g a n d s e n d s i z e c a n n o t b e c h a n g e d .
  • Page 784 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 67 of 207 Tap the appropriate original size key. After the settings are completed, tap • I f y o u a r e s e n d i n g a l o n g o r i g i n a l , t a p t h e [ L o n g S i z e ] k e y . U s e t h e a u t o m a t i c d o c u m e n t f e e d e r t o s c a n a l o n g o r i g i n a l .
  • Page 785 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 68 of 207 SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES Overview When scanning a non-standard size original such as a postcard, specify the original size by numeric values after placing the original. The width can be from 1" to 17" (25 mm to 432 mm), and the height can be from 1"...
  • Page 786 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 69 of 207 Tap the [OK] key. After the settings are completed, tap twice. On the base screen, check that the specified size is displayed on the [Original] key. T o c a n c e l t h e s p e c i f i e d s i z e s e t t i n g s : T a p t h e [ A u t o ] k e y .
  • Page 787 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 70 of 207 SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE Overview Tap this key to specify the send size as a paper size. If the specified send size is larger than the scan size, the image will be enlarged. If the specified send size is smaller than the scan size, the image will be reduced.
  • Page 788 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 71 of 207 Tap the "Image Orientation" key with the same orientation as the original image. If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted. After the settings are completed, tap T o c o n f i g u r e t h e d e f a u l t s e t t i n g o f i m a g e o r i e n t a t i o n , s e l e c t [ S y s t e m S e t t i n g s ] i n "...
  • Page 789: Changing The Exposure

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 72 of 207 CHANGING THE EXPOSURE Overview The exposure can be changed to suit the darkness of the original. W h e n u s i n g t h e a u t o m a t i c d o c u m e n t f e e d e r , t h e e x p o s u r e s e t t i n g c a n n o t b e c h a n g e d o n c e s c a n n i n g h a s b e g u n .
  • Page 790 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 73 of 207 After the adjustment, tap 04-048.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 791: Changing The Resolution

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 74 of 207 CHANGING THE RESOLUTION Overview The resolution can be specified to match the characteristics of the original, such as text or photo, the size of the text, and the darkness of the image. Resolution settings R e s o l u t i S u g g e s t i o n...
  • Page 792 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 75 of 207 • W h e n u s i n g t h e a u t o m a t i c d o c u m e n t f e e d e r , t h e r e s o l u t i o n s e t t i n g c a n n o t b e c h a n g e d o n c e s c a n n i n g h a s b e g u n .
  • Page 793: Receiving A Fax Automatically

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 76 of 207 RECEIVING A FAX AUTOMATICALLY Overview When the reception mode is set to "Auto Reception", the machine will receive and print faxes automatically. • W h e n f a x r e c e p t i o n i s i n p r o g r e s s , i t i s p o s s i b l e t o r e s e r v e a t r a n s m i s s i o n b y p e r f o r m i n g t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n i n m e m o r y t r a n s m i s s i o n m o d e .
  • Page 794 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 77 of 207 S e l e c t [ S y s t e m S e t t i n g s ] i n " S e t t i n g m o d e " → [ F a x D a t a R e c e i v e / F o r w a r d ] →...
  • Page 795 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 78 of 207 How to check the fax reception mode You can check current fax reception mode in the system area at the top of the screen. 04-052.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 796: Receiving A Fax Manually

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 79 of 207 RECEIVING A FAX MANUALLY Overview A fax can be received manually using the touch panel (manually). • W h e n a n s w e r i n g t h e t e l e p h o n e b y t a p p i n g t h e [ S p e a k e r ] k e y , y o u w i l l b e a b l e t o h e a r t h e v o i c e o f t h e c a l l e r , b u t y o u w i l l n o t b e a b l e t o s p e a k .
  • Page 797 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 80 of 207 r e c e i v e d d a t a a s s o o n a s p o s s i b l e w i t h o u t l e a v i n g i t i n t h e f a x m e m o r y .
  • Page 798 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 81 of 207 PRINTING A PASSWORD- PROTECTED FAX (HOLD SETTING FOR RECEIVED DATA PRINT) Enable this setting to have faxes received and stored in memory without being printed. To print the faxes, a password must be entered. When this function is used, a password entry screen appears in the touch panel when a fax is received.
  • Page 799 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 82 of 207 • T h e r e c e i v e d f a x e s w i l l b e s t o r e d i n m e m o r y r e g a r d l e s s o f w h e t h e r t h e y a r e r e c e i v e d a u t o m a t i c a l l y o r m a n u a l l y .
  • Page 800 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 83 of 207 PRINTING RECEIVED DATA AT A SPECIFIED TIME You can start printing the received data at a specified time. For stress-free printing, you should avoid printing large numbers of pages at peak times during the day, and when you do not urgently need to print.
  • Page 801 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 84 of 207 ( a d m i n i s t r a t o r ) " a n d i f [ R e c e i v e d D a t a I m a g e C h e c k S e t t i n g ] i s e n a b l e d .
  • Page 802 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 85 of 207 CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING Overview Check the image of received data on the touch panel before printing. This function is available when [System Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled in "Setting mode".
  • Page 803 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 86 of 207 Operation When data is received, is shown at the top of the screen. In the System Information, select the [Event Information] tab and tap the [Check Fax Reception Image] key The received data is listed. Y o u c a n a l s o d i s p l a y t h e r e c e i v e d d a t a l i s t b y t a p p i n g t h e j o b s t a t u s d i s p l a y a n d t a p p i n g t h e [ C h e c k R e c e i v e d D a t a ] k e y o n t h e a c t i o n p a n e l o f J o b S t a t u s s c r e e n .
  • Page 804 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 87 of 207 • T a p t o s h o w a l i s t o f r e c e i v e d d a t a . T h e l i s t v i e w o r t h u m b n a i l s v i e w c a n b e c h a n g e d d e p e n d i n g o n t h e s e t t i n g m o d e .
  • Page 805 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 88 of 207 • [Select All]: Selects all displayed images. • [Release All Page]: Cancels all images that have been selected by "Select All". • : Use these keys to enlarge or reduce an image. •...
  • Page 806: Forwarding Received Faxes

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 89 of 207 FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES (FAX DATA FORWARD) Overview When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received faxes can be forwarded to another previously stored fax machine. This function is convenient in an office or work area that has two or more telephone lines and another fax machine is connected to a different line than the machine.
  • Page 807 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 90 of 207 Operation Tap the [Settings] key on the Home screen. Select [System Settings] and tap the [Fax Data Receive/Forward] key. Tap the [Fax Settings] key. Tap the [Execute] key in [Forward Received Data] to begin forwarding.
  • Page 808 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 91 of 207 FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONS (INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS) Overview You can have received faxes automatically forwarded to a fax address, Internet fax address, e-mail address, file server address, desktop address, or network folder address. Received data can be forwarded to the specified destinations without being printed.
  • Page 809 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 92 of 207 b e p r i n t e d o n t h e f a x e s . ( " R e c e i v i n g D a t e & T i m e P r i n t " i s d i s a b l e d .
  • Page 810 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 93 of 207 [ S c a n n e r ] o r [ F a x ] t a b i n t h e j o b s t a t u s s c r e e n , t a p t h e [ C h e c k e r r o r b o x o f f o r w a r d i n g r e c e i v e d d a t a ] k e y o n t h e a c t i o n p a n e l .
  • Page 811 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 94 of 207 Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the "Setting mode" menu and click the [Add] button. Enter a "Table Name". Select the forwarding conditions. Select [Forward to All Forward Destinations] or [Forward based on the Conditions of Forward Destination 1-3]. Select the sender whose faxes will be forwarded.
  • Page 812 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 95 of 207 U p t o t h r e e f o r w a r d i n g d a y a n d t i m e s e t t i n g s c a n b e s e t f o r o n e f o r w a r d i n g t a b l e , a n d a f o r w a r d i n g d e s t i n a t i o n c a n b e s e t f o r e a c h s e t t i m e .
  • Page 813 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 96 of 207 • Enter an e-mail address, an Internet fax address, a direct SMTP address, or a fax number directly and tap the [Add] key. • When you specify an e-mail address or a fax number, you can use the global address search.
  • Page 814 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 97 of 207 • T o d e l e t e a f o r w a r d i n g t a b l e , c l i c k t h e c h e c k b o x n e x t t o t h e t a b l e n a m e s o t h a t i t i s s e l e c t e d ( ) a n d c l i c k [ D e l e t e ] .
  • Page 815 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 98 of 207 SAVING RECEIVED FAXES TO THE MACHINE'S HARD DISK (INBOUND ROUTING) Received faxes can be saved to the machine's hard disk. Saved faxes can be viewed on a computer. Set PDF, TIFF (multi) or TIFF (signal) for the saved faxes. You can also receive notification of the storage result or storage folder by E-mail.
  • Page 816 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 99 of 207 Select [Valid] in "faxreceive:Use of Storage" and click the [Save] button. Settings for saving received faxes to the hard disk In Setting mode, click [Application Settings] →[Inbound Routing (HDD Storage) Settings]. (Administrator rights required.) •...
  • Page 817 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 100 of 207 FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLY Overview Received faxes can be forwarded manually after receipt. T h i s f u n c t i o n i s a v a i l a b l e w h e n [ S y s t e m S e t t i n g s ] → [ O p e r a t i o n S e t t i n g s ] →...
  • Page 818 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 101 of 207 Tap the key of the received data you wish to forward, and tap the [Forward to Other Address] key • to show a list of received data. The list view or thumbnails view can be changed depending on the setting mode.
  • Page 819 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 102 of 207 SAVING RECEIVED DATA Overview You can save received faxes in the document filing folder. T h i s f u n c t i o n i s a v a i l a b l e w h e n [ S y s t e m S e t t i n g s ] → [ O p e r a t i o n S e t t i n g s ] →...
  • Page 820 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 103 of 207 Y o u c a n a l s o d i s p l a y t h e r e c e i v e d d a t a l i s t b y t a p p i n g t h e j o b s t a t u s d i s p l a y a n d t a p p i n g t h e [ C h e c k R e c e i v e d D a t a ] k e y o n t h e a c t i o n p a n e l o f J o b S t a t u s s c r e e n .
  • Page 821 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 104 of 207 04-061.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 822 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 105 of 207 STORING FAX OPERATIONS (PROGRAM) Overview This function collectively stores various settings as one program. The stored program can be retrieved using an easy operation. For example, suppose that the same 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size documents are distributed to branch offices in various regions once a month.
  • Page 823 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 106 of 207 T a p t h e [ S t a r t ] k e y . S c a n a n d s e n d t h e o r i g i n a l . C o n s i d e r a b l e t i m e i s r e q u i r e d t o s e n d W h e n a p r o g r a m i s s t o r e d , s e t t i n g s t h e d o c u m e n t s e a c h m o n t h b e c a u s e t...
  • Page 824 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 107 of 207 According to the function stored in the program, place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER DOCUMENT GLASS Tap [Call Program] key on the action panel. Tap the desired program key.
  • Page 825 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 108 of 207 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time.
  • Page 826 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 109 of 207 SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE (Multi Shot) Overview Reduce two original pages to the equal size and sent them as a single page. This function is convenient when you have a large number of original pages and wish to reduce the number of pages sent.
  • Page 827 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 110 of 207 • T h i s f u n c t i o n c a n n o t b e u s e d t o g e t h e r w i t h D u a l P a g e S c a n o r C a r d S h o t .
  • Page 828 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 111 of 207 Tap the [Original] key. Tap the [Image Orientation] key with the same orientation as the placed original. If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted. After the settings are completed, tap Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
  • Page 829 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 112 of 207 [ P r e v i e w ] k e y , t a p t h e [ A d d i t i o n a l S c a n ] k e y t o s c a n t h e n e x t o r i g i n a l .
  • Page 830 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 113 of 207 SENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE (CARD SHOT) Overview Send the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page, without the need to send each side separately. W h e n u s i n g t h i s f u n c t i o n , t h e o r i g i n a l m u s t b e p l a c e d o n t h e d o c u m e n t g l a s s .
  • Page 831 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 114 of 207 Operation Place a card face down on the document glass. • DOCUMENT GLASS Enter the destination fax number. • ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK •...
  • Page 832 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 115 of 207 • T a p t h e a r e a s d i s p l a y i n g w i d t h a n d h e i g h t s i z e s r e s p e c t i v e l y , a n d e n t e r t h e s i z e s u s i n g t h e n u m e r i c k e y s .
  • Page 833 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 116 of 207 T a p t h e [ P r e v i e w ] k e y t o c h e c k t h e p r e v i e w o f a n i m a g e b e f o r e s e n d i n g a f a x .
  • Page 834 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 117 of 207 SENDING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES (JOB BUILD) Overview This function lets you separate an original consisting of numerous pages into sets, scan each set using the automatic document feeder, and transmit the pages in a single transmission. You can also send a fax by placing originals in both the automatic document feeder and on the document glass.
  • Page 835 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 118 of 207 • T h e s c a n s e t t i n g s c a n b e c h a n g e d f o r e a c h s e t o f o r i g i n a l s . Operation Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.
  • Page 836 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 119 of 207 A checkmark appears on the icon. T o c a n c e l t h e J o b B u i l d s e t t i n g : T a p t h e [ J o b B u i l d ] k e y t o c l e a r t h e c h e c k m a r k .
  • Page 837 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 120 of 207 c o m b i n a t i o n w i t h " M u l t i S h o t " i n " O t h e r s " , o n l y t h e e x p o s u r e c a n b e c h a n g e d w h e n s c a n n i n g e a c h e v e n - n u m b e r e d p a g e o f t h e o r i g i n a l p a g e s .
  • Page 838 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 121 of 207 SENDING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES (MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL) Overview This feature lets you scan and transmit originals of different sizes at the same time; for example, 8-1/2" x 14" (B4) size originals mixed together with 11"...
  • Page 839 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 122 of 207 T h i s f u n c t i o n i s n o t a v a i l a b l e i f [ S y s t e m S e t t i n g s ] → [ D e v i c e C o n t r o l ] →...
  • Page 840 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 123 of 207 F o r m i x e d s i z e o r i g i n a l s , s e t " O r i g i n a l " t o " A u t o " . A checkmark appears on the icon.
  • Page 841 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 124 of 207 SENDING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE PAGES (DUAL PAGE SCAN) Overview The left and right sides of an original can be transmitted as two separate pages. This function is useful when you wish to fax the left and right pages of a book or other bound document as separate pages.
  • Page 842 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 125 of 207 Operation Place the original on the document glass. • DOCUMENT GLASS Align the center of the original with the appropriate size mark Enter the destination fax number. • ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 843 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 126 of 207 • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK • THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS • USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK •...
  • Page 844 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 127 of 207 F o r m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n , s e e " C H E C K I N G T H E I M A G E T O B E T R A N S M I T T E D "...
  • Page 845 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 128 of 207 SPLITTING A PAMPHLET BY PAGE AND TRANSMITTING THE PAGES SUCCESSIVELY (BOOK DIVIDE) Overview The opened pages of a saddle-stitch pamphlet are split by page according to actual page order. When using this function, you do not need to sort the original pages to be sent.
  • Page 846 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 129 of 207 • ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK • THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS • USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK •...
  • Page 847 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 130 of 207 A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. T a p t h e [ P r e v i e w ] k e y t o p r e v i e w t h e o u t p u t i m a g e b e f o r e s e n d i n g i t . A f t e r y o u h a v e s c a n n e d a n o r i g i n a l b y t a p p i n g t h e [ P r e v i e w ] k e y , t a p t h e [ A d d i t i o n a l S c a n ] k e y t o s c a n t h e n e x t o r i g i n a l .
  • Page 848 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 131 of 207 ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE IMAGE (ERASE) Overview The erase function is used to erase shadows on images produced when scanning thick originals or books. This function erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form, but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows.
  • Page 849 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 132 of 207 I f a r a t i o s e t t i n g i s u s e d i n c o m b i n a t i o n w i t h a n e r a s e s e t t i n g , t h e e r a s e w i d t h w i l l c h a n g e a c c o r d i n g t o t h e s e l e c t e d r a t i o .
  • Page 850 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 133 of 207 Enter the destination fax number. • ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK • THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS • USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION •...
  • Page 851 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 134 of 207 • I f t h e [ R e v e r s e e r a s e p o s i t i o n o f b a c k f a c e . ] c h e c k b o x i s s e t t o , t h e e d g e i n t h e p o s i t i o n o p p o s i t e t o t h e e r a s e d e d g e o n t h e f r o n t s i d e w i l l b e e r a s e d .
  • Page 852 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 135 of 207 T a p t h e [ P r e v i e w ] k e y t o p r e v i e w t h e o u t p u t i m a g e b e f o r e s e n d i n g i t . A f t e r y o u h a v e s c a n n e d a n o r i g i n a l b y t a p p i n g t h e [ P r e v i e w ] k e y , t a p t h e [ A d d i t i o n a l S c a n ] k e y t o s c a n t h e n e x t o r i g i n a l .
  • Page 853 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 136 of 207 SENDING A THIN ORIGINAL (SLOW SCAN MODE) Overview Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding. W h e n s l o w s c a n m o d e i s s e l e c t e d , 2 - s i d e d s c a n n i n g i s n o t p o s s i b l e . Operation Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.
  • Page 854 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 137 of 207 I f t h e o r i g i n a l s a r e i n s e r t e d w i t h t o o m u c h f o r c e , t h e y m a y c r u m p l e a n d m i s f e e d .
  • Page 855 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 138 of 207 T R A N S M I T T E D " . H o w e v e r , s e t t i n g s f o r t h i s f u n c t i o n c a n n o t b e c h a n g e d i n t h e p r e v i e w s c r e e n .
  • Page 856 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 139 of 207 CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION (ORIGINAL COUNT) Overview Count the number of scanned original sheets and display the count before transmission. Checking the number of scanned original sheets before transmission helps prevent transmission mistakes.
  • Page 857 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 140 of 207 • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK • USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND • SENDING BY CHAIN DIALING Tap the [Original Count] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. T o c a n c e l t h e O r i g i n a l C o u n t s e t t i n g : T a p t h e [ O r i g i n a l C o u n t ] k e y t o c l e a r t h e c h e c k m a r k .
  • Page 858 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 141 of 207 Tap the [OK] key to start transmission. I f t h i s f u n c t i o n i s c o m b i n e d w i t h [ J o b B u i l d ] , t h e c o u n t r e s u l t i s d i s p l a y e d a f t e r t h e [ R e a d - E n d ] k e y h a s b e e n t a p p e d .
  • Page 859: Verification Stamp

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 142 of 207 STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS (VERIFICATION STAMP) Overview This function stamps each original that is scanned using the automatic document feeder, allowing you to verify that all originals were correctly scanned. • T o u s e t h e v e r i f i c a t i o n s t a m p f u n c t i o n , t h e o p t i o n a l s t a m p u n i t m u s t b e i n s t a l l e d .
  • Page 860 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 143 of 207 • AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER Enter the destination fax number. • ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK • THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS • USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION •...
  • Page 861 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 144 of 207 T R A N S M I T T E D " . H o w e v e r , s e t t i n g s f o r t h i s f u n c t i o n c a n n o t b e c h a n g e d i n t h e p r e v i e w s c r e e n .
  • Page 862: Calling A Fax Machine And Initiating Reception (Polling)

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 145 of 207 CALLING A FAX MACHINE AND INITIATING RECEPTION (POLLING) Overview When you connect to another machine and receive a document from it, this is called "Polling". The document reception from another machine is called "Polling Reception". You can enter multiple destination numbers.
  • Page 863 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 146 of 207 • T h e f u n c t i o n c a n o n l y b e u s e d w h e n t h e o t h e r m a c h i n e i s S u p e r G 3 o r G 3 c o m p a t i b l e a n d h a s a p o l l i n g f u n c t i o n .
  • Page 864 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 147 of 207 • M u l t i p l e f a x n u m b e r s c a n b e e n t e r e d ( m a x i m u m o f 5 0 0 ) . P o l l i n g w i l l t a k e p l a c e i n t h e o r d e r t h a t t h e m u l t i p l e f a x n u m b e r s w e r e e n t e r e d .
  • Page 865: Initiating Polling Reception Manually

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 148 of 207 INITIATING POLLING RECEPTION MANUALLY Overview Use the manual polling reception when you must start polling after listening to a recorded greeting, such as when using a fax information service. • M a k e s u r e t h e r e i s n o o r i g i n a l i n t h e m a c h i n e w h e n u s i n g t h e p o l l i n g r e c e p t i o n f u n c t i o n .
  • Page 866 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 149 of 207 • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK • THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS • USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK •...
  • Page 867 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 150 of 207 ADDING YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO FAXES (FAX OWN NUMBER SENDING) Your sender information (date, time, sender name, sender fax number or destination name, number of pages) is automatically added to the top of each fax page you transmit. Example of the sender information printed (1) Date, time: The date and time of transmission.
  • Page 868 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 151 of 207 I n " S e t t i n g m o d e " , s e l e c t [ S y s t e m S e t t i n g s ] → [ D e f a u l t S e t t i n g s ] →...
  • Page 869 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 152 of 207 TEMPORARILY CHANGING THE SENDER INFORMATION (OWN NAME SELECT) Overview You can temporarily change sender information to be used in the own number sending by selecting from data stored separately. T h e f u n c t i o n i s r e l e a s e d w h e n t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n w i t h t h e c h a n g e d s e n d e r i n f o r m a t i o n e n d s .
  • Page 870 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 153 of 207 • THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS • USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK • USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND • SENDING BY CHAIN DIALING Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Own Name Select] key.
  • Page 871 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 154 of 207 When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended, and the machine stands by for transmission.
  • Page 872 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 155 of 207 SPECIFYING THE TIME FOR COMMUNICATION (TIMER) Overview Specify a time at which a transmission or broadcast transmission will automatically take place. Transmission begins automatically at the specified time. This function is helpful when you wish to perform reserved, broadcast or other transmissions during your absence or at night or other times when telephone rates are low.
  • Page 873 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 156 of 207 • T h i s f u n c t i o n c a n n o t b e u s e d i n d i r e c t t r a n s m i s s i o n m o d e o r w h e n t h e s p e a k e r i s u s e d t o d i a l .
  • Page 874 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 157 of 207 • DOCUMENT GLASS Specify the destination fax number. • ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK • THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS • USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION •...
  • Page 875 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 158 of 207 • T a p t h e a r e a s d i s p l a y i n g t h e h o u r a n d m i n u t e r e s p e c t i v e l y , a n d e n t e r t h e v a l u e s u s i n g t h e n u m e r i c k e y s .
  • Page 876 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 159 of 207 F o r m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n , s e e " C H E C K I N G T H E I M A G E T O B E T R A N S M I T T E D "...
  • Page 877: Transaction Report

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 160 of 207 CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE TRANSACTION REPORT (TRANSACTION REPORT) Overview A transaction report is automatically printed out to alert you when a transmission fails or when a broadcast transmission is performed. The transaction report contains a description of the transmission (date, start time, name of other party, time required, number of pages, result, etc.).
  • Page 878 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 161 of 207 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. • AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER • DOCUMENT GLASS Enter the destination fax number. • ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS •...
  • Page 879 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 162 of 207 • T h e p r i n t c o n d i t i o n s f o r a t r a n s a c t i o n r e p o r t a r e a s f o l l o w s : ◦...
  • Page 880 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 163 of 207 T a p t h e [ P r e v i e w ] k e y t o p r e v i e w t h e o u t p u t i m a g e b e f o r e s e n d i n g i t . A f t e r y o u h a v e s c a n n e d a n o r i g i n a l b y t a p p i n g t h e [ P r e v i e w ] k e y , t a p t h e [ A d d i t i o n a l S c a n ] k e y t o s c a n t h e n e x t o r i g i n a l .
  • Page 881: Polling Memory

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 164 of 207 SENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER MACHINE POLLS YOUR MACHINE (POLLING MEMORY) Sending a document that has been scanned into memory when another machine polls your machine is called "Polling Memory". Prior to polling, the document that will be faxed to the other machine must be scanned into a polling memory box.
  • Page 882: Polling Security Setting

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 165 of 207 RESTRICTING POLLING ACCESS (POLLING SECURITY SETTING) The following explains "Polling Security Setting", a feature restricting other machines that can use polling memory. When a machine requests fax transmission, you can only allow the machine to use polling memory if its programmed sender fax number matches a fax number stored in your machine as a polling passcode number.
  • Page 883: Scanning A Document Into Polling Memory

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 166 of 207 SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO POLLING MEMORY Overview Follow these steps to scan a document into the memory box for polling transmission (Public Box). I f a n o t h e r d o c u m e n t r e m a i n s i n t h e m e m o r y b o x ( P u b l i c B o x ) , t h e n e w l y s c a n n e d d o c u m e n t i s a d d e d t o t h e p r e v i o u s d o c u m e n t .
  • Page 884 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 167 of 207 Tap the [Polling Memory] tab. Tap the [Public Box] key from the folder list. Tap the [Change Number of Times] key on the action panel. Tap the [Once] key or [Unlimited] key to specify the number of times.
  • Page 885: Checking The Document In The Public Box

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 168 of 207 CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE PUBLIC BOX Overview You can check the document stored in the machine's memory box (public box) for memory polling. Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab.
  • Page 886: Deleting A Document From The Public Box

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 169 of 207 DELETING A DOCUMENT FROM THE PUBLIC BOX Overview Delete a document from the memory box (public box) when it is no longer required. Operation Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab.
  • Page 887 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 170 of 207 T o c a n c e l d e l e t i n g t h e d o c u m e n t : T a p t h e [ N o ] k e y . 04-083.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 888 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 171 of 207 F-CODE COMMUNICATION This function allows the machine to communicate with other machines that also support F-code. It enables exchange of confidential documents (confidential communication), retrieval (polling) and distribution (polling memory) of information, distribution of information to multiple destinations (relay broadcast transmission) with other machines that support F-code communication.
  • Page 889 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 172 of 207 How F-codes work A fax that is transmitted with an F-code is received in the memory box of F-code communication in the receiving machine specified by the F- code (sub-address and passcode). If the F-code sent by the transmitting machine does not match the F-code in the receiving machine, reception will not take place.
  • Page 890 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 173 of 207 CREATING MEMORY BOXES IN THE MACHINE FOR F-CODE COMMUNICATION Before the F-code communication function can be used, special memory boxes must be created in "Setting mode". Set the box name and F-code (sub-address and passcode) in each memory box, and store them.
  • Page 891 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 174 of 207 • F-code relay request transmission 04-086.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 892 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 175 of 207 F-CODE DIALING When performing an F-code operation, the F-code (sub-address and passcode) is appended to the fax number that is dialed. Check the F- code (sub-address and passcode) stored in the memory box in the other machine before you perform an F-code transmission.
  • Page 893 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 176 of 207 F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION By sending a fax to an F-code memory box (confidential) stored in the receiving machine (your machine or the other machine), the sender can direct the transmission specifically to the user of the box. This is convenient for sending sensitive documents that you do not wish people other than the recipient to see, or when the receiving machine is shared by multiple departments.
  • Page 894 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 177 of 207 CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES Overview Send a fax to a destination fax number after adding the F-code (sub- address and passcode). I f n e c e s s a r y , t h e F - c o d e c o n f i d e n t i a l t r a n s m i s s i o n c a n b e u s e d i n c o m b i n a t i o n w i t h a b r o a d c a s t t r a n s m i s s i o n o r t i m e r t r a n s m i s s i o n .
  • Page 895 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 178 of 207 Tap the [Passcode] key. Symbol "/" is entered. Enter the passcode using the numeric keys. • I f t h e s u b - a d d r e s s a n d p a s s c o d e a r e a l r e a d y r e g i s t e r e d , y o u c a n s e l e c t a o n e - t o u c h k e y a s w e l l .
  • Page 896 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 179 of 207 CHECKING FAXES RECEIVED BY F- CODE CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION Overview When an F-code confidential fax received, the fax is stored in the memory box specified by the F-code. To check received faxes, enter the print passcode.
  • Page 897 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 180 of 207 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. From the [Confidential] tab, tap the [Check received data list] key on the action panel. Tap the key of the memory box containing the confidential fax.
  • Page 898 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 181 of 207 Displays the received data image. To print the document, tap the [Print] key. 04-090.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 899: Polling Reception Using F- Codes

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 182 of 207 POLLING RECEPTION USING F- CODES Overview This function enables your machine to call another machine and initiate reception of a fax stored in an F-code memory box (polling memory) in the other machine. During the polling operation, your machine must correctly specify the F-code (sub-address and passcode) configured in the other machine.
  • Page 900 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 183 of 207 • I f n e c e s s a r y , u s e t h e F - c o d e p o l l i n g r e c e p t i o n i n c o m b i n a t i o n w i t h a b r o a d c a s t t r a n s m i s s i o n o r t i m e r t r a n s m i s s i o n .
  • Page 901 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 184 of 207 • I f t h e s u b - a d d r e s s a n d p a s s c o d e a r e a l r e a d y r e g i s t e r e d , y o u c a n s e l e c t a o n e - t o u c h k e y a s w e l l .
  • Page 902 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 185 of 207 SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO A MEMORY BOX FOR F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION Overview When your machine receives a transmission request from another machine, this function sends a fax stored in an F-code memory box (polling memory) in your machine to that machine.
  • Page 903 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 186 of 207 • I f o t h e r d o c u m e n t s h a v e a l r e a d y b e e n s t o r e d i n t h e m e m o r y b o x , t h e d o c u m e n t i s a d d e d t o t h e p r e v i o u s l y s t o r e d d o c u m e n t s .
  • Page 904 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 187 of 207 Change the settings as necessary. After the settings are completed, tap key. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
  • Page 905: Checking The Document In The F-Code Memory Polling Box

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 188 of 207 CHECKING THE DOCUMENT IN THE F-CODE MEMORY POLLING BOX Overview You can check the document stored in the F-code memory polling box. A d o c u m e n t i n a m e m o r y b o x c a n n o t b e p r i n t e d w h i l e t h e d o c u m e n t i s b e i n g t r a n s m i t t e d .
  • Page 906 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 189 of 207 DELETING A DOCUMENT STORED FOR F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION Overview Delete the document stored in an F-code memory polling box in order to be able to store a new document. A d o c u m e n t i n a m e m o r y b o x c a n n o t b e d e l e t e d w h i l e t h e d o c u m e n t i s b e i n g t r a n s m i t t e d .
  • Page 907 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 190 of 207 T o c a n c e l t h e d o c u m e n t d e l e t i o n : T a p t h e [ N o ] k e y . 04-094.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514...
  • Page 908 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 191 of 207 RELAY REQUEST TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES Overview This function sends a fax to an F-code relay broadcast memory box in another machine and have that machine relay the fax to multiple destination machines. When the destination machines are far from your machine, sending the fax to a relay machine that is close to the destination machines can help reduce telephone charges.
  • Page 909 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 192 of 207 • F - c o d e ( s u b - a d d r e s s a n d p a s s c o d e ) a n d t h e d e s t i n a t i o n i n t h e F - c o d e r e l a y b r o a d c a s t m e m o r y b o x o f t h e r e c i p i e n t m a c h i n e s h o u l d b e v e r i f i e d b y t h e r e c i p i e n t i n a d v a n c e .
  • Page 910 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 193 of 207 Specify the destination. • ENTERING A DESTINATION NUMBER USING THE NUMERIC KEYS • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION NUMBER FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK • THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS • USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION •...
  • Page 911 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 194 of 207 T a p t h e [ P r e v i e w ] k e y t o c h e c k t h e p r e v i e w o f a n i m a g e b e f o r e s e n d i n g a f a x .
  • Page 912 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 195 of 207 RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES When your machine receives an F-code relay request transmission, the fax is received and stored in an F-code relay broadcast memory box in your machine. Your machine then relays the fax to each of the destination machines programmed in the memory box.
  • Page 913 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 196 of 207 • I t i s n o t n e c e s s a r y f o r t h e d e s t i n a t i o n m a c h i n e s t o s u p p o r t F - c o d e c o m m u n i c a t i o n .
  • Page 914: Connecting An Extension Telephone

    USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 197 of 207 CONNECTING AN EXTENSION TELEPHONE You can connect an existing telephone to the machine. The telephone can be used for voice calls and to start fax reception on the machine. Connect the extension telephone as shown below. As an example, you can make a phone call using the existing phone, speak to the other party, and then press the [START] key to fax an original that has been placed to that party.
  • Page 915 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 198 of 207 • Y o u c a n c o n n e c t a t e l e p h o n e w i t h a m o d u l a r c a b l e p l u g t o y o u r m a c h i n e .
  • Page 916 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 199 of 207 RECEIVING A FAX AFTER ANSWERING A CALL ON THE EXTENSION TELEPHONE (REMOTE RECEPTION) Overview Follow the steps below if you need to start fax reception after answering a call and speaking on the extension telephone. If you are using a pulse line, set the extension to send tone signals.
  • Page 917 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 200 of 207 Signal the machine to start fax reception. Press from the extension telephone. Replace the receiver. The machine beeps when reception ends. 04-105.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 918 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 201 of 207 FAX JOBS When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To confirm the fax job status, tap the mode display and select the fax. When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing, see the following items: •...
  • Page 919 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 202 of 207 COMPLETED FAX TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS A usual transmission job moves to the job list when transmission is completed. Then the status field displays "Send OK". However, received faxes, timer transmission faxes, retries, fax forwarding, and other fax jobs are displayed in the job status screen as follows: Fax reception jobs When a fax is being received, the status field displays "Receiving"...
  • Page 920 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 203 of 207 When the inbound routing settings are enabled, reception jobs are handled as follows depending on the print setting. • FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONS (Inbound routing settings) Received data is not printed When a data is being received, "Receiving"...
  • Page 921 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 204 of 207 PRINTING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORTS You can have the machine print a log of recent image sending activity (date, name of other party, time required, result, etc.). The Image Sending Activity Report contains useful information such as the types of errors that occurred.
  • Page 922 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 205 of 207 INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN Error types and other information are printed in the result column of transaction and activity reports. When a transaction or activity report is printed, check the result of the transaction in the result column and take action as needed.
  • Page 923 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 206 of 207 P A S S # N G T h e c o n n e c t i o n w a s b r o k e n b e c a u s e t h e p o l l i n g p a s s c o d e w a s n o t c o r r e c t .
  • Page 924 USER'S MANUAL - FAX Page 207 of 207 m e m o r y t r a n s m i s s i o n , o r c o n f i d e n t i a l r e c e p t i o n ) a p p e a r s i n * * * * * * .
  • Page 925 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 1 of 191 Digital full-color multifunction machine MX-4140N/MX- 4141N/MX-5140N/MX-5141N PRINTING "IMAGE SEND" file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 926 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 2 of 191 USES OF THE NETWORK SCANNER The network scanner allows you to create an image file from the original data scanned by the machine, and send the file over a network to a PC, FTP server, or other destinations. If necessary, it scans the original using a TWAIN-compliant application on your PC.
  • Page 927: Internet Fax Mode

    USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 3 of 191 The scanned file is sent to a network folder on a Windows PC on the same network as the machine. When the file is sent, it is also possible to send an e-mail to a previously stored e-mail address to inform the recipient of the location of the file.
  • Page 928 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 4 of 191 BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER To use the machine as a network scanner, you must store sender information, configure server settings, store destinations in the address book, and perform other required operations. Make sure the main power switch is in the "...
  • Page 929: Storing Sender Information

    USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 5 of 191 I n " S e t t i n g m o d e " , s e l e c t [ S y s t e m S e t t i n g s ] → [ D e f a u l t S e t t i n g s ] →...
  • Page 930 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 6 of 191 • T o c o n f i g u r e s e r v e r s e t t i n g s : I n " S e t t i n g m o d e " , s e l e c t [ N e t w o r k S e t t i n g s ] → [ S e r v i c e s S e t t i n g s ] .
  • Page 931 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 7 of 191 STORING DESTINATIONS FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP To store your computer in the machine as a destination for Scan to Desktop, Network Scanner Tool must be installed from the "Sharpdesk/Network Scanner Utilities" CD-ROM that accompanies the machine.
  • Page 932: Before Sending To A Direct Smtp Address

    USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 8 of 191 BEFORE SENDING TO A DIRECT SMTP ADDRESS The machine supports Direct SMTP, which lets you directly send Internet faxes within your company without using a mail server. For the procedure for storing the Direct SMTP address in the address book, see "STORING CONTACTS"...
  • Page 933 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 9 of 191 T o c a n c e l t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n : D o s o f r o m t h e j o b s t a t u s s c r e e n . •...
  • Page 934 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 10 of 191 SELECTING NETWORK SCANNER MODE You can select the network scanner mode from the Home Screen or from each operation mode as follows: Operation Changing modes from the Home Screen Tap the icon indicating the network scanner mode Tap one of [E-mail], [FTP/Desktop], [Network Folder], and [Internet Fax].
  • Page 935 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 11 of 191 I n " S e t t i n g m o d e " , b y s e l e c t i n g [ S y s t e m S e t t i n g s ] → [ I m a g e S e n d S e t t i n g s ] →...
  • Page 936 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 12 of 191 BASE SCREEN OF EACH MODE This section explains the keys on a base screen, taking as an example the E-mail base screen. Several methods are available in the Image Send mode, including Scan to E-mail and Scan to FTP. The base screen layout slightly differs depending on how image is sent.
  • Page 937: Image Send Sequence

    USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 13 of 191 IMAGE SEND SEQUENCE First, to place the machine in a desired image send mode, tap the appropriate icon in the Home screen. • SELECTING NETWORK SCANNER MODE Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
  • Page 938 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 14 of 191 • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK • VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS • USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION • ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY • SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER •...
  • Page 939 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 15 of 191 • AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-SIDED ORIGINAL) • SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE(ENLARGE/REDUCE) • SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE • SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES •...
  • Page 940 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 16 of 191 Send the original. Tap the [Start] key. Y o u c a n c h e c k t h e p r e v i e w o f a n i m a g e b y t a p p i n g t h e [ P r e v i e w ] k e y . W h e n t h e o r i g i n a l i s p l a c e d o n t h e d o c u m e n t g l a s s : R e p e a t t h e p l a c i n g o r i g i n a l a n d t r a n s m i s s i o n p r o c e d u r e s u n t i l a l l o r i g i n a l s h a v e b e e n s e n t .
  • Page 941 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 17 of 191 TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES The following original sizes can be transmitted M i n i m u m o r i g i n a l s i z e M a x i m u m o r i g i n a l s i z e U s i n g t h e a u t o m a t i c d o 5 - 1 / 8 "...
  • Page 942 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 18 of 191 THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL When a standard size original is placed, the original size is automatically detected and displayed in "Scan Size" on the base screen. • SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE •...
  • Page 943 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 19 of 191 I n c h - 1 1 1 " x 1 7 " , 8 - 1 / 2 " x 1 4 " , 8 - 1 / 2 " x 1 1 1 "...
  • Page 944 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 20 of 191 RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK Overview In the address book screen, simply tap the one-touch key of a registered destination to retrieve the destination. If necessary, store multiple destinations in a one-touch key. Tapping the key will retrieve all the stored destinations.
  • Page 945 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 21 of 191 Tap the one-touch key of contact or group that has a destination. • The destinations displayed on the list can be narrowed with categories, job types, indexes, and keywords. • A list can be displayed in the order of the search numbers. •...
  • Page 946 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 22 of 191 • T o r e t r i e v e a d e s t i n a t i o n b y u s i n g a s e a r c h n u m b e r , t a p t h e [ C a l l S e a r c h N u m b e r ] k e y o n t h e a c t i o n p a n e l .
  • Page 947 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 23 of 191 VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS Overview When multiple destinations have been selected, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a destination from the list (cancel selection of the destination). Operation Tap the [Confirm Address] key on the action panel.
  • Page 948 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 24 of 191 T o c a n c e l a s p e c i f i e d d e s t i n a t i o n : T a p t h e k e y o f t h e d e s t i n a t i o n t h a t y o u w i s h t o c a n c e l , a n d t a p t h e [ O K ] k e y .
  • Page 949 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 25 of 191 USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION Tap the [Call Search Number] key. Enter a search number (4 digits) using the numeric keys and tap When the search number is entered, the stored address is retrieved and specified as a destination.
  • Page 950 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 26 of 191 • W h e n e n t e r i n g s e a r c h n u m b e r s s u c h a s " 0 0 0 1 " a n d " 0 0 1 1 " , " 0 " c a n b e o m i t t e d .
  • Page 951: Entering An Address Manually

    USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 27 of 191 ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY In the base screen of a mode, tap [Text Box] On the base screen of Internet Fax, tap [Text Box] to display the screen you want to select the address type. Tap either the [Internet Fax] or [Direct SMTP] key.
  • Page 952 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 28 of 191 ( W h e n D i r e c t S M T P i s u s e d , t r a n s m i s s i o n c o n f i r m a t i o n i s n o t p e r f o r m e d .
  • Page 953: Specifying A Network Folder

    USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 29 of 191 SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER Tap the [Browse] key in the network folder entry screen. • To directly enter a folder, tap the [Path Imput to Folder] key. The soft keyboard is displayed. •...
  • Page 954 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 30 of 191 Tap the key of the server or computer that you wish to access. If a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name and password, check with your server administrator and enter the appropriate user name and password.
  • Page 955 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 31 of 191 RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK Overview When an LDAP server is configured in the "Setting mode (Web version)", look up an address in a global address book and retrieve the destination address for Scan to E-mail or Internet fax transmission (excluding Direct SMTP addresses).
  • Page 956 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 32 of 191 of [Object] to select the object to be searched, and tap [Touch to Input Keyword] to enter the initial of destination, then tap the [Start Search] key. The search results will appear after a brief interval. H o w t o s e a r c h E n t e r t h e s e a r c h c h a r a c t e r s ( m a x i m u m o f 6 4 c h a r a c t e r s ) .
  • Page 957 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 33 of 191 T o c h e c k t h e d e s t i n a t i o n i n f o r m a t i o n : T a p t h e o n e - t o u c h k e y o f t h e t a r g e t d e s t i n a t i o n , a n d t h e n t a p t h e [ C o n f i r m D e s t i n a t i o n I n f o r m a t i o n ] k e y .
  • Page 958 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 34 of 191 USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND Overview Select a destination from a transmission log and resend the data. The destinations of the most recent 50 transmissions by Scan to E- mail, Internet fax (including Direct SMTP addresses), and/or fax are stored.
  • Page 959 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 35 of 191 Operation Tap the [Select among addresses recently sent to] key on the action panel. Tap the key of the destination to resend. The last 50 addresses used for transmission are displayed. If a screen requiring you to enter the user name and password appears, enter the information.
  • Page 960: Sending An Image In Scan Mode

    USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 36 of 191 SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE Overview An image can be sent in scan mode (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder). • I f t h e m e m o r y b e c o m e s f u l l w h i l e t h e o r i g i n a l s a r e b e i n g s c a n n e d , a m e s s a g e w i l l a p p e a r a n d s c a n n i n g w i l l s t o p .
  • Page 961 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 37 of 191 • T o p l a c e a l a r g e p o r t r a i t - o r i e n t e d o r i g i n a l , p l a c e i t a s s h o w n i n t h e f i g u r e t i t l e d "...
  • Page 962 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 38 of 191 : Scan to Network Folder : Scan to Desktop • A f t e r a o n e - t o u c h k e y i s t a p p e d , i f t h e s c r e e n i s c h a n g e d w i t h o u t t a p p i n g , t h e d e s t i n a t i o n o f t h e t a p p e d k e y i s a u t o m a t i c a l l y s p e c i f i e d .
  • Page 963 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 39 of 191 • Y o u c a n c h a n g e e x p o s u r e , r e s o l u t i o n , f i l e f o r m a t , c o l o r m o d e , a n d o t h e r s e t t i n g s .
  • Page 964 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 40 of 191 P D F f i l e . T o c a n c e l E n c r y p t P D F , t a p t h e [ C a n c e l ] k e y . T h e f o r m a t s e t t i n g s s c r e e n w i l l a p p e a r t o l e t y o u c h a n g e t h e f i l e t y p e .
  • Page 965 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 41 of 191 CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXT AT THE TIME OF SCAN TRANSMISSION Overview Change the subject, file name, reply-to, and body text when performing a scan transmission. If necessary, directly enter the text. •...
  • Page 966 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 42 of 191 Tap a pre-set text key. After the settings are completed, tap T o c a n c e l t h e s e l e c t i o n o f t h e s u b j e c t : T a p t h e [ C l e a r ] k e y .
  • Page 967 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 43 of 191 I f u s e r a u t h e n t i c a t i o n i s b e i n g u s e d , t h e i n f o r m a t i o n o f t h e u s e r t h a t l o g g e d i n w i l l b e a p p l i e d , a n d t h u s t h e r e p l y a d d r e s s c a n n o t b e c h a n g e d .
  • Page 968 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 44 of 191 T o c l e a r a l l e n t e r e d t e x t : T a p t h e [ C l e a r A l l ] k e y . W h e n t h i s k e y i s t a p p e d , t h e e n t i r e b o d y o f t h e m e s s a g e i s e r a s e d i m m e d i a t e l y ;...
  • Page 969: Sending A Fax In Internet Fax Mode

    USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 45 of 191 SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE Overview Transmits a fax in Internet Fax mode. This procedure can also be used to perform a direct transmission by Direct SMTP. • I f t h e m e m o r y b e c o m e s f u l l w h i l e t h e o r i g i n a l s a r e b e i n g s c a n n e d , a m e s s a g e w i l l a p p e a r a n d s c a n n i n g w i l l s t o p .
  • Page 970 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 46 of 191 I f a d e f a u l t a d d r e s s h a s b e e n c o n fi g u r e d u s i n g " S e t t i n g m o d e " → [ S y s t e m S e t t i n g s ] →...
  • Page 971 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 47 of 191 ( R o t a t i o n s e n d i n g i s n o t a v a i l a b l e f o r o r i g i n a l s w i t h 8 - 1 / 2 " x 1 1 "...
  • Page 972 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 48 of 191 • C H A N G I N G T H E E X P O S U R E A N D O R I G I N A L I M A G E T Y P E •...
  • Page 973 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 49 of 191 • If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a beep will sound when scanning is completed and transmission will take place. If the original was placed on the document glass, replace it with the next original and tap the [Start] key.
  • Page 974 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 50 of 191 CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, AND BODY TEXT AT THE TIME OF INTERNET FAX TRANSMISSION Overview Change the subject, file name, and body text when performing an Internet fax transmission. If necessary, directly enter the text. Configure a file name, and other settings for an Internet fax using the Send Settings of the other functions.
  • Page 975 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 51 of 191 T o c a n c e l t h e s e l e c t i o n o f t h e s u b j e c t : T a p t h e [ C l e a r ] k e y .
  • Page 976 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 52 of 191 • To select a pre-set text previously stored in the Setting mode (Web version), tap the [Pre-set Message] key. • To directly enter the body text, tap the [Edit] key. • E n t e r u p t o 1 8 0 0 c h a r a c t e r s .
  • Page 977 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 53 of 191 SENDING THE SAME IMAGE TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS (BROADCAST TRANSMISSION) Overview Send the same scanned image to multiple scan, Internet fax, and fax mode destinations in a single operation. One operation allows you to send data to up to 500 destinations, including the reserved send jobs.
  • Page 978 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 54 of 191 A t r a n s m i s s i o n i s p e r f o r m e d , i g n o r i n g h y p e r l i n k s w i t h S c a n t o F T P a n d S c a n t o N e t w o r k F o l d e r a d d r e s s e s .
  • Page 979 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 55 of 191 • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK • USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND • O n e - t o u c h k e y s t h a t c a n n o t b e u s e d f o r b r o a d c a s t t r a n s m i s s i o n a r e g r a y e d o u t t o p r e v e n t s e l e c t i o n .
  • Page 980 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 56 of 191 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. T a p t h e [ P r e v i e w ] k e y t o c h e c k t h e p r e v i e w o f a n i m a g e b e f o r e s e n d i n g a f a x .
  • Page 981 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 57 of 191 SETTING MODES WHEN MULTIPLE TYPES OF ADDRESSES ARE INCLUDED IN A BROADCAST TRANSMISSION This section explains settings you should bear in mind if multiple types of addresses are included in a broadcast transmission. When a broadcast transmission includes a mix of several types of addresses (such as scan mode and Internet Fax mode destinations), its settings are enabled for all addresses regardless of which mode screen...
  • Page 982 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 58 of 191 A n a d d r e s s o f a m o d e i n w h i c h t h e n u m b e r o f o r i g i n a l s h e e O r i g i n a l c o u n t t s a r e s p e c i f i e d , i f i t e x i s t s , i s e n a b l e d .
  • Page 983 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 59 of 191 RESENDING TO UNSUCCESSFUL BROADCAST TRANSMISSION DESTINATIONS Overview The results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job status screen. If transmission to any of the destinations failed, resend the image to those destinations. Operation Tap the job status display.
  • Page 984 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 60 of 191 After tapping the key of the completed broadcast transmission, tap the [Check Details of Selected Job] key on the action panel. " B r o a d c a s t x x x x " w i l l a p p e a r a s t h e d e s t i n a t i o n o f t h e b r o a d c a s t j o b k e y .
  • Page 985 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 61 of 191 • U s i n g d o c u m e n t f i l i n g : Y o u w i l l r e t u r n t o t h e d o c u m e n t f i l i n g r e s e n d s c r e e n w i t h t h e u n s u c c e s s f u l d e s t i n a t i o n s e n t e r e d .
  • Page 986 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 62 of 191 SENDING AN INTERNET FAX FROM A PC (PC-I-FAX) A file on a computer can be sent via the machine as a fax (PC-I Fax function). Faxes are sent using the PC-I Fax function in the same way that documents are printed.
  • Page 987 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 63 of 191 T h i s f u n c t i o n i s a v a i l a b l e f o r t r a n s m i s s i o n . I n t e r n e t f a x e s r e c e i v e d o n t h e m a c h i n e c a n n o t b e r e c e i v e d t o a c o m p u t e r t h a t i s c o n n e c t e d t o t h e m a c h i n e .
  • Page 988 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 64 of 191 AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-SIDED ORIGINAL) Overview The automatic document feeder is used to automatically scan both sides of an original. T h e s e t t i n g s o n 2 - s i d e d s c a n n i n g a r e c l e a r e d w h e n t r a n s m i s s i o n h a s c o m p l e t e d .
  • Page 989 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 65 of 191 Tap the [Image Orientation] key with the same orientation as the placed original. If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted. After the settings are completed, tap T o c a n c e l 2 - s i d e d s c a n n i n g : T a p t h e [ 2 - S i d e d o r i g i n a l t y p e T a b l e t ] k e y o r t h e [ 2 - S i d e d o r i g i n a l t y p e B o o k ] k e y t h a t h a s b e e n f o r c i b l y d i s p l a y e d a n d...
  • Page 990 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 66 of 191 SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (ENLARGE/REDUCE) When the original is placed, its size is automatically detected. The size of the placed original is indicated as the scan size, and the size to be transmitted is indicated as the send size.
  • Page 991 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 67 of 191 • W h e n t h e o r i g i n a l s i z e i s a n i n c h s i z e o r a n o n - s t a n d a r d s i z e , o r i f t h e s i z e i s n o t d e t e c t e d c o r r e c t l y , m a n u a l l y s p e c i f y t h e o r i g i n a l s c a n s i z e .
  • Page 992 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 68 of 191 SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE Overview When the original size is not standard (inch size or non-standard size) or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size. •...
  • Page 993 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 69 of 191 I f y o u a r e s e n d i n g a l o n g o r i g i n a l , t a p t h e [ L o n g S i z e ] k e y . U s e t h e a u t o m a t i c d o c u m e n t f e e d e r t o s c a n a l o n g o r i g i n a l .
  • Page 994 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 70 of 191 SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES Overview When scanning a non-standard size original such as a card or postcard, specify the original size using numeric values after placing the original. The width can be from 1"...
  • Page 995 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 71 of 191 Tap the [Execute] key. On the base screen, check that the specified size is displayed on the [Original] key. After the settings are completed, tap twice. 05-040.htm file://C:\Files\PM Files\COPIERS\CR3.5\Virgo II\Manuals downloaded from MFP\mx514... 4/24/2014...
  • Page 996 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 72 of 191 SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE Overview Tap this key to specify the send size as a paper size. If the specified send size is larger than the scan size, the image will be enlarged. If the specified send size is smaller than the scan size, the image will be reduced.
  • Page 997 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 73 of 191 D e p e n d i n g o n t h e p a p e r s i z e s p e c i f i e d f o r t h e " S c a n S i z e " , i t m a y n o t b e p o s s i b l e t o s e l e c t s o m e s i z e s f o r t h e "...
  • Page 998 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 74 of 191 T h e r a t i o u s e d f o r r e d u c t i o n o r e n l a r g e m e n t o f t h e o r i g i n a l w i l l a p p e a r b e t w e e n t h e "...
  • Page 999: Changing The Exposure And Original Image Type

    USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 75 of 191 CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE Overview Optimum scanning is ensured by selecting exposure and original image type based on the original. W h e n u s i n g t h e d o c u m e n t g l a s s t o s c a n m u l t i p l e o r i g i n a l p a g e s , c h a n g e t h e e x p o s u r e s e t t i n g e a c h t i m e y o u c h a n g e p a g e s .
  • Page 1000 USER'S MANUAL - IMAGE SEND Page 76 of 191 How to select the original type (Scan mode, Data entry mode) I t e m D e s c r i p t i o n A u t o T h e o r i g i n a l i m a g e t y p e i s a u t o m a t i c a l l y s e l e c t e d t o m a t c h t h e o r i g i n a l .

This manual is also suitable for:

Mx-4141nMx-5140nMx-5141n

Table of Contents